JP6531131B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as an gaming machine, there is one which is controlled to be in a predetermined state such as a game suspension, for example, when an error occurs (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, when priorities are set for various types of errors, and if the priority of the error that occurred later is higher than the priority of the error that occurred earlier, the error that occurred later instead of the notification of the error that occurred earlier Are reported (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2001-58022 A JP, 2010-233715, A

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 which is controlled to a predetermined state such as a game stop due to the occurrence of an error, as in Patent Document 2, when the priority of the later occurring error is higher than the priority of the earlier occurring error. However, if an error that occurred later is reported instead of the notification of an error that occurred earlier, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to confirm an event that is triggered to be controlled to a predetermined state.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can prevent an event which is controlled to a predetermined state from becoming difficult to confirm. I assume.

In order to solve the problem, the gaming machine according to the means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Abnormality determination unit capable of determining the occurrence of abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, a portion that executes abnormality determination processing to determine the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. )When,
When the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, the notification is ended when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, and the notification about the determined abnormality is performed. Abnormality notification means (for example, when an error having a higher priority than an error being notified is determined in S407 of the main side error processing, if a game stop flag is not set, an error with a high priority error By transmitting a designated command to the effect control board 12, the error informing process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 executes the error informing of an error with a high priority, which has already been executed. A part to execute instead of
The state control means (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the firing of the gaming ball in S411 and controls the game to stop) in accordance with the judgment of abnormality by the abnormality judgment means, based on the judgment of abnormality. Part),
Signal control means for controlling an external output signal output to the outside of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
When a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set), the abnormality notification means Continue the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, an error having a higher priority than the error in the notification) If it is determined that the game stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 does not transmit the error designation command of the high priority error to the effect control board 12. (A part of continuing notification of an error that is already in progress) without executing error notification of a high priority error),
The signal control means
The external output signal can be brought into the second state when being controlled to the predetermined state,
In the case where a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the predetermined state is not controlled, the external output signal is changed from the first state to the second state based on the priority of the abnormality; There are cases where the output signal does not change from the first state to the second state,
The external output signal is not changed from the second state to the first state regardless of the priority of the abnormality when a new event corresponding to the abnormality occurs while being controlled to the predetermined state. It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent that the event that is triggered to be controlled to the predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm .

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine described in means 1, and
The state control means can control the game stop state as the state corresponding to the abnormality (for example, when the CPU 103 determines the occurrence of the error corresponding to the game stop, prohibits the firing of the game ball in S411) Part of the game)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to stop the game when it is determined to be abnormal, and to prevent the event which is controlled to the game stop state from becoming difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine described in the means 1 or 2.
When an abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, an external output means (for example, a security signal) capable of outputting a predetermined external output signal (for example, a security signal) to the outside of the gaming machine in a state corresponding to the abnormality Terminal board 16),
The predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined external output signal is output (for example, in the modification, a security signal is output as the predetermined state to output the security signal) In the state, it is characterized by continuing the notification of the error that is already being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an event corresponding to the output of the external output signal from being difficult to confirm.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to the means 3, and
A plurality of movable bodies (e.g., a plurality of prizes in the modification) operatively provided at a position apart from the origin position and at least a part of the operation range overlapping;
Detection means capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the origin position (for example, an origin sensor capable of detecting that each accessory is positioned at the origin position in the modification);
Equipped with
The abnormality determination means can determine the movable body abnormality based on the event that the movable body is not detected by the detection means for each of the plurality of movable bodies (e.g. , Home return error (abnormal) judgment),
The state control means is configured to prohibit operation of each of the plurality of movable bodies based on the fact that the movable body abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means (for example, by setting the dead end state in the modification) Let each part be inoperable),
When the movable body abnormality is determined for one of the plurality of movable bodies, determination of the movable body abnormality or notification of the movable body abnormality is not performed for the other movable body (for example, in the modification) When a return-to-origin error (abnormality) is determined for one of the prizes, the determination or return of the return-to-origin error (abnormality) is not performed for the other prizes (movable bodies))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load due to useless abnormality determination, and to make it possible to specify a movable body that has caused the operation inhibited state.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4, and
The abnormality determination means can determine a plurality of abnormalities controlled to the game stop state by the state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to judge abnormality)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to determine an abnormality that causes more gaming stop states.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, and
Control to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit) advantageous to the player based on the game medium (eg, a game ball) entering a specific area (eg, the third count switch 24B of the second special variable prize ball device 7B) Possible gaming machines,
A vibration detection unit (eg, vibration sensor 80) capable of detecting abnormal vibration;
The abnormality determination means can determine the vibration abnormality when the abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration detection means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 determines the vibration detection 1 error in the abnormality determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to determine that the fraud causing the game medium to enter the specific area due to the vibration is abnormal.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, and
A predetermined area (eg, the second variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning opening, the first special variable winning ball device 7A serving as the large winning opening, and the second special variable winning member). A ball device 7B, an ordinary winning ball device 6A to be a first start winning opening, and general winning openings 50A to 50D to be a general winning area;
An information display means provided on a main board (for example, the main board 11) for controlling a game and capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, combination ratio, combination ratio) related to a prize ball to be paid out (For example, the display monitor 29),
Equipped with
The information display means is provided on a main substrate for controlling a game so as not to hinder visibility.
According to this feature, it can be recognized what kind of adjustment has been made.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means 8-means 15 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, as a gaming machine capable of playing a game, as shown in JP-A-2014-76173, it is detected whether or not the movable part (movable body) is positioned at the origin position at the time of activation, When the movable part is not positioned, return operation control (first operation control) for returning the movable part to the home position is performed, and after the movable part is positioned at the home position by the return operation control, the movable part is Some have performed initial operation control (second operation control) to confirm that they can operate normally. However, in such a game machine, in the return operation control (first operation control), the movable role is operated in a situation where it is not possible to know what position the movable role is. If the speed of the movable part is controlled (accelerated) as in the initial operation control (second operation control) in the return operation control (first operation control), it is provided to restrict the movement of the movable part There is a problem that the movable part can not be operated safely in the return operation control (first operation control), such as being damaged due to collision with a certain restriction member or the like. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of safely operating the movable body in the first operation control.

In order to solve the problem, the gaming machine according to the means 8 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A movable body provided movably between an origin position and a position away from the origin position (for example, a first retractable position at which the first movable portion 90302 tilts in a lateral direction (see FIG. 47). (A) (see FIG. 47) and a first effect position (see FIG. 47 (B)) in which the first movable portion 90302 is vertically erected at a position away from the first retraction (see FIG. 47B) 1 At a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905 and a second retraction position (origin position, initial position, see FIG. 48A) for retracting to one side of the movable role 90300 or the effect display device 905 A second movable part 90400 or the like provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between a second effect position (see FIG. 48B) which is disposed and separated from the second retracted position;
Drive means for operating the movable body (for example, a first movable role drive motor 90303, a second movable role drive motors 90411, 90421);
Control means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means;
Equipped with
The control means
The first operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, the non-detection operation control of the step S90105 to the step S90114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control or the step S90120 of the effect control CPU 90120). ~ The second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the part that executes the operation control at the time of detection in step S90128) The third operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for performing effects by the movable body (eg, a portion that executes the operation control for actual operation check in steps S90201 to S90213 of the second initialization process) Movable body effect in the period and the big hit game state where the fluctuation display of the design is executed as operation control Such control executed) and it is possible to perform,
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within the range of the first speed and the second speed higher than the first speed (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control is for confirming the actual operation) When performing operation control, control is performed so that the movable part operates at a speed within the range of the first speed (minimum speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Do.)
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or less than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 is not detected as the first operation control) When performing operation control or detection operation control, the movable combination is at a speed less than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check as the second operation control (for example, the same speed as the minimum speed in operation control for actual operation check) To control to operate
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first operation control, since the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, it can be safely positioned at the home position.

The gaming machine according to the means 9 is the gaming machine according to the means 8, and
The control means controls the movable body to operate at a single speed all the time in the first operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 performs non-detection operation control as the first operation control) Or when performing operation control at the time of detection, the part that controls the movable part to operate at a single (constant) minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation check)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed at which the movable body is positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and breakage or the like of the movable body can be prevented.

The gaming machine according to the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 8 or 9.
The control unit controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in the second operation control in the first operation control (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control performs the first operation control). When performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control, the part that controls the movable combination to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check as the second operation control)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to shorten the period of the first operation control by selecting the maximum speed at which the movable body can operate safely without lowering the speed excessively while securing the safe operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine according to the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to 10,
It comprises detection means (for example, first movable combination object origin detection sensor 90316, second movable combination object origin detection sensors 90440A, 90440B) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the origin position,
The control means
When the movable body is not detected by the detection unit, non-detection operation control is performed as the first operation control, and when the movable body is detected by the detection unit, the first operation control is performed. Operation control at detection time is performed (for example, if the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state at step S90104 in the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control at step S90105 to step S90114, When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state in step S90104, the part that executes operation control at detection in step S90120 to step S90128),
In the non-detection operation control, the movable object is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or less than the speed at which the movable member is operated in the detection operation control (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control performs first operation control) Part that controls the movable part to operate at the lowest speed in the detection operation control when executing
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of a defect in the detection means can also be grasped by the first operation control.

The gaming machine according to the means 12 is the gaming machine according to the means 11, and
The control means
The movable body is controlled to perform abnormal operation control as the first operation control when the movable body is not detected by the detection unit when a specific abnormality occurs.
In the abnormal time operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or less than the speed at which the movable body is operated in the detection time operation control (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control performs the second initialization process) If the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S90109, the first movable combination 90300 and the second movable combination 90400 are at the lowest speed in the operation control for checking the actual operation until the operation error determination count reaches "3". Control to move toward the home position)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movable body can be operated safely even in abnormal operation control.

The gaming machine according to the means 13 is the gaming machine according to the means 12, and
The control means performs control such that the second operation control is not performed even if the movable body is detected by the detection means by the abnormal operation control (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control performs a second initialization) When there is storage of the return-to-origin error of the target role at step S90201 in the process, the process proceeds to S90220 and the portion for which operation control for actual operation check is not performed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from stopping at a position other than the origin during the second operation control due to an abnormality.

The gaming machine according to the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 to 13.
As the movable body, it has a first movable body (for example, a first movable part 90300 and a second movable part 90400) and a second movable body (for example, a third movable part 90500),
The control means performs the first operation control and the second operation control for the first movable body, but does not perform the first operation control for the second movable body. If, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90102 in the second initialization process that the movable role is not an origin detection target role that requires origin detection, the process proceeds to step S90130. Part that does not perform operation control and detection operation control)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the necessary movable body can perform the second operation control, and the operation confirmation time by the second operation control can be shortened.

The gaming machine according to the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 8 through 14.
As the movable body, it has a first movable body (for example, a first movable part 90300) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable part 90400),
In the first operation control of each of the first movable body and the second movable body, the control means performs control such that the movable body operates at the first speed in the second operation control of each of the first movable body and the second movable body. (For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation of each of the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400, each actual operation The part that controls the movable part to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirmation),
The speeds in the first operation control are different between the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, even if the same control speed is set in the first operation control corresponding to each movable combination, each movable When there are differences in the size, weight, movement mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the prize, the actual movement speed of each movable figure is not necessarily the same.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to shorten the period of the first operation control while securing the safety operation of each movable body by the operation speed according to each movable body.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view showing a game machine in an example. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. (A) is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), (C) is a big hit type determination table (second special symbol (D) is an explanatory view showing a big hit classification determination table (for V winning), and (E) is an explanatory view showing contents of various big hits. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is a figure showing a memory map of CPU in a main board. It is a figure showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a character item ratio display apparatus, (B-1)-(B-5) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor . It is an explanatory view explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning a prize information processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning a prize information display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main side error process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the priority of various errors and error, cancellation | release conditions, etc. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting of an error, the decision | availability of a game, and the output condition of a security signal. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of an error. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hitting end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main side error processing according to Modification 1; FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sub-side error process according to Modification Example 2. It is the front view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates production control command. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd initialization process. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing an operation example of non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control; It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of operation control for real operation confirmation in the 1st movable role thing 90300. FIG. It is a figure showing the example of operation control for real operation check in the 2nd movable role article 90400. It is a figure which shows the example of operation control for real operation confirmation in the 3rd movable role thing 90500. It is a figure showing an example of operation control at the time of detection of the 1st movable role thing 90300 and the 2nd movable role thing 90400.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment. In the following embodiments, in the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” is abbreviated as “S1”.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device. The front of the game board 2 is covered by a glass door frame 3a provided so as to be openable and closable in a frame (underframe) 3 for a game machine. These glass door frames 3a can be opened by a player in the game arcade by inserting an open key into the open lock K and unlocking them, and a general player or the like can not open the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed to be.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of segments or dot matrix, etc., and includes plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") is displayed variably (variation display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". . In addition, although the form which made 1st special symbol display 4A and 2nd special symbol display 4B square was illustrated, it is not limited to this, and these 1st special symbol display 4A and 2nd special symbols Each segment which comprises indicator 4 B may be arranged irregularly.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 2, an effect display device 5 is provided. The effect display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, is displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the effect symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variation display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A or the variation display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that become the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Han) are displayed on the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, nine character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to nine types, but may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that causes a loss.

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number (for example, "9"). The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the effect symbol display area 5L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 5, a first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are arranged. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, a hold storage display is performed to display the number of pending variable displays (the number of special map hold storages) corresponding to each special symbol. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is satisfied, the variation display based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition for permitting the start of the variable display is not established because 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed. The pending storage display in the first pending storage display area 5D is a pending storage display generated based on the starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second pending storage display area 5U The hold storage display is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening.

  In this example, a circular white display (a holding memory displayed in the first holding memory display area 5D) is a holding memory display generated based on the starting winning game by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening. Displayed as a circular white display (pending storage displayed in the second pending storage display area 5U) with a pending storage display generated based on the starting prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening Display). In addition, based on the start storage by which the game ball passes (enters) the holding memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening The display mode of the pending storage display generated may be a different display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first holding storage display area 5D and the second holding storage display area 5U, the number of special drawing holding memories is specified in the upper part of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for possible display are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the first special view is suspended. The second special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  General winning openings 50A and 50D are provided on the left and right of the effect display device 5, and general winning openings 50B and 50C are provided in the lower area of the general winning opening 50A. Further, below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has a normally open state (refer to the solid line position in FIG. 1) and a tilted position (refer to the dotted line position in FIG. 1) in the vertical position by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized part shown in FIG. And a second electric motor-operated part having a movable wing-piece that changes to the second state.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It will be in the open state where it is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  The game balls having passed through (entered) the general winning openings 50A, 50B, 50C, 50D are the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, and the third general winning opening switch 26C, shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, which are detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D and based on the detection.

  The special variable winning ball unit 7 in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B are integrated is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. There is.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning prize unit 7 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the special variable winning winning ball unit 7, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning winning ball device 7A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning winning ball device 7B. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a synthetic resin material having translucency is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 7, and the player can select the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. The game ball flowing through the inside of 7, especially the inside of the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B can be visually recognized.

  The first special variable winning ball device 7A includes a first large winning opening door 701 driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and is changed to an open state and a closed state by the first large winning opening door 701 Form the first big winning opening. The first big winning opening is formed to open upward at the left of the special variable winning ball unit 7. The first large winning opening door 701 can slide in the longitudinal direction between the closed position where the first large winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 82 and the opening position where the first large winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 is on, the first large winning opening door 701 opens the first large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the first large winning opening (enter) Make it easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 701 closes the first large winning opening so that the game ball can not pass (enter) the first large winning opening. As described above, the first large winning opening changes into an open state advantageous for the player who easily passes (enters) the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first big prize opening is provided. May be

  The game ball having passed (entered) the first winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 23 by passing through the first count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first winning opening. . The game ball having passed the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening that is in the open state in the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the first large winning opening This is a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the normally variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like not shown, and if the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state 2 Start winning prize mouth is supposed to win.

  The second special variable winning ball device 7B shown in FIG. 8 is formed to project upward than the first special variable winning ball device 7A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 2). A winning opening door 711 is provided, and the second winning opening door 711 forms a second winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second big winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B. The second large winning opening door 711 is between the first state (opening state) of opening the second large winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 and the second state (closing state) of closing the second large winning opening. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the on state, the second large winning opening door 711 makes the second large winning opening open state, the gaming ball is the second 2 Make it easy to pass (enter) the big winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 711 closes the second large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the second large winning opening. (Do not enter) As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 24A by passing through the second counting switch 24A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. . A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 24A. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B, other ordinary winnings, such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example More balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, when the second large winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second large winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second large winning opening This is a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B, a gaming ball flow channel 750 is formed in which gaming balls having passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. The game ball channel 750 is a main path 740 (area along the solid line in FIG. 8) through which the game ball having passed the second big winning opening can pass and a branch path 741 branched from the main path 740 (dotted line in FIG. Region). A backflow prevention member 730 described later is disposed between the main path 740 and the branch path 741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740, a first branch portion 742 where the branch path 741 branches from the main path 740 is provided, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 730 in the main path 740 A second branch portion 743 is provided where the branch path 741 branches from the main path 740. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the main path 740 is movable from the first branch 742 or the second branch 743 to the branch path 741 side.

  A third count switch 24B through which game balls can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 740, and the game balls pass the third count switch 24B to be operated by the third count switch 24B. It is detected. The game ball having passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Also, the gaming ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the diverging path 741 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 2 and passes the fourth count switch 24C. , And detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

  In addition, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B during the small hit game described later, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game may be controlled to the big hit gaming state. Therefore, during the small hit game, while the second large winning opening door 711 is open, the course of the game ball is changed by applying vibration etc. and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B. And, since the fraud that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player becomes possible, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to stop the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 742 in the main path 740, a restriction member 721 is provided which restricts and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch 24B. The restricting member 721 protrudes into the main path 740 by driving the solenoid 85 (see FIG. 2), thereby restricting the flow toward the third count switch 24B in the main path 740 of the gaming ball. By retracting from the main path 740, it is provided slidably in the front-rear direction between the gaming ball in the main path 740 of the main path 740 and a permission state that allows the flow toward the third count switch 24B.

  The upper portion of the restriction member 721 is formed to be a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 741 in a front view. . Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the main path 740 while the regulating member 721 is in the regulating state, the gaming ball runs along the second branch portion 743 along the flat surface formed on the upper portion of the regulating member 721. It is induced to flow down toward the branch path 741 via the route.

  Between the main path 740 and the branch path 741, the backflow prevention member 730 is pivotally supported by a pivot directed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot and branched from the main path 740 side when the gaming ball guided by the flat surface of the restriction member 721 contacts from the main path 740 side. It can be moved (turned) so that it can pass to the side 741. Specifically, it is pivotable between a permitted position inclined to open between main path 740 and branch path 741 and a restricted position closed between main path 740 and branch path 741. It is provided. A rib 801 protruding forward is provided above the regulating member 721, and the backflow preventing member 730 abuts against the rib 801 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view at the regulating position.

  In addition, the backflow prevention member 730 is normally disposed at the restricted position by its own weight, and in this restricted position, the gaming ball guided by the flat surface abuts from the main path 740 side (right side in front view) The game ball is pushed by the game ball and pivots clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch 743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 24B Movement of the gaming ball from the 740 side to the branch path 741 side where the fourth count switch 24C is provided is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 730 is in the restricted position, the backflow prevention member 730 is in contact with the rib 801 even if the game ball abuts from the side of the branch path 741 (left side in front view) The counterclockwise rotation of the member 730 is restricted. At this time, the width dimension between the tip of the backflow prevention member 730 and the lower portion of the second branch 743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, so the fourth count switch 24C is provided. The movement of the gaming ball from the branch path 741 side to the main path 740 side where the third count switch 24B is provided is surely restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 1, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41. The passing gate 41 is disposed between the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the special variable winning ball unit 7. In the passing gate 41, a gate switch 21 described later is incorporated.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, winning openings other than the above-described winning openings may be provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 7 and the like) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing.

  The upper tray member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. Is provided.

  The game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decoration frame surrounding the effect display device 5 disposed substantially at the center of the game area, and the hit ball operation handle The game ball hit weakly (left strike) flows down the left game area, and the game ball hit sharply by the hit operation handle (right strike) flows down the right game area.

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the left gaming area can be paid to the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. A large number of obstacle nails are disposed so as to be able to win on the winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning ball device 7B and to be able to pass through the passing gate 41. That is, in the case of a left-handed strike, the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B can not win, and can not pass through the passing gate 41.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, for example, the fluctuation display of the previous common drawing is finished after the common drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied. The variable display of the common drawing by the container 20 is started.

  In the fluctuation display of this common figure, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when the predetermined time which becomes the common fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which becomes the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, for example, as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting the gaming ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the regular winning ball device 6A by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The variation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is established because the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the previous special variation display or the end of the big hit gaming state, the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the special symbol The finalized special symbol (variation display result) to be the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special view becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in variation display of special figure by 1st special symbol display 4A is different from each symbol in variation display of special figure by 2nd special symbol display 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special views.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 7A In a period 701 until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the first big winning opening is opened. As a result, a round is performed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A is brought into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first large winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round is ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the first large winning opening etc.) It is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special view and becomes the "small hit" as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 7B of the second The 2 big winning opening door 711 opens the 2nd big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. It will be in the state. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B is in the first state (opened state) which is advantageous for the player.

  In the small hit game state, the second large winning opening door 711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it open several times in a hit gaming state.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening passes the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 24B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 24C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, the second large winning opening door 711 of the second special variable winning ball device 7B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) The second big winning opening is opened in the period until the lapse of a) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 7B is brought into the first state (opened state) advantageous to the player is executed. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled to be in the first state when it is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, but is limited thereto Instead, the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). It should be noted that even if the number of round game executions has not reached the upper limit number, the round game may end due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the fact that the game ball has not won the second big winning opening). Good.

  It should be noted that after the end of the jackpot gaming state in the time reduction state (time reduction control) is performed in the range of a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times or 20 times), and a normal state in which time reduction control is not performed It is controlled by either. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special drawing fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, variation display of a special figure is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, that the variation display result is "big hit", in the small hit gaming state It may be ended when any of the conditions for the game ball to pass through the third count switch 24B is established first.

  When time saving control is performed, control to make the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B shorter than that in the normal state, or ordinary Control to shorten the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the common drawing by the symbol display 20 (general drawing fluctuation time) shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of each common drawing is "per common drawing" Control to improve the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the fluctuation display result becoming "per common place" The game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to be longer than when, and control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state, thereby increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. By the player Advantageous to become control is performed taking. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Thereby, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special drawing can be frequently performed. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control boards such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a terminal board (information output board) 16 as shown in FIG. ing. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various substrates such as, for example, a payout control substrate, a launch control substrate, and an interface substrate are disposed on the back of the gaming board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Also, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 which can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 is provided with various winning information related to winning. It also has a function to display the

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is provided with a magnetic sensor 60 for detecting fraud by a magnet, a radio wave sensor 70 for detecting fraud due to an electromagnetic wave, and vibration to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The vibration sensor 80 for detecting frauds such as changing the course of the door, the door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front of the game board 2 in an openable / closable manner, the opening of the first big winning opening door 701 The first large winning opening door sensor 91 for detecting the second large winning opening door sensor 92 for detecting the opening of the second large winning opening door 711, provided on the path where the game ball flows down to the lower plate Various sensors such as a full tank sensor 93 for detecting that the gaming balls are full on the lower plate, and a ball breakage sensor 94 for detecting that the number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls is less than or equal to a predetermined number Are connected and these Based on the detection signal output from the sensor, also has function of determining the occurrence of various abnormal (error). Although the ball breakage sensor 94 is described as being directly connected to the main substrate 11 in FIG. 2, it is actually connected to the payout substrate, and is connected via the payout substrate. There is.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control An output circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 to 83 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal substrate 16 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 2 is enclosed in the substrate case 201, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed at the center of the main substrate 11 There is. The display monitor 29 is disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 is viewed. Since the main substrate 11 can not be viewed in the state where the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front side when viewing the main substrate 11 visually recognizes the back side of the game board 2 in the state where the glass door frame 3a is opened. The front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  In addition, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), each winning a prize mouth (the 1st big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth, the 1st starting winning a prize mouth, 1st-4th general winning a prize) The number of game ball entry into the mouth, hereinafter also referred to as the “entry area”, is calculated, and various winning information such as the ratio, the winning ratio, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29 by the calculation. By displaying these pieces of winning information, it is possible to confirm various types of winning information, such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio after installation in the game arcade. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board so that the gaming media enter the general winning opening with a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed at a predetermined frequency whether game media has entered the general winning opening. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed, it is confirmed as to what adjustments have been made and, as a result of the adjustment, whether game media have entered the general winning opening with a frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to recognize in the pachinko gaming machine 1 what adjustment has been made after installation.

  The output circuit 111 is also connected to a controller 84 for driving the solenoid 85. The controller 84 starts driving control of the solenoid 85 by receiving an activation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. When the controller 84 drives the solenoid 85, the restricting member 721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the effect display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like is included.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the special figure game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable symbol display of the special symbol game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result such as a special symbol or an effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “off” or “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) or Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is “off”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command which designates the fluctuation stop (decision) of the effect pattern in the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specifying command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the generated error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19, it is determined that any error (abnormality) occurs on the side of the effect control board 12 The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process (see FIG. 30) described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special drawing in first special symbol display 4A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B was satisfied based on it.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage count notification command for notifying the first special view storage limit in order to display the special view storage limit in an identifiable manner in the first storage limit display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 5U or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100 is a V prize notification designating command for notifying that the third count switch 24B has been turned on by the fact that the V winning is achieved, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch 24B.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 The random number circuit 104 is configured to include an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 and a real time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for special image display result determination, a random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  FIG. 5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the case. Among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display result is "big hit" corresponding to each of the cases where the variation display mode of the production design is "non reach" and "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the change pattern corresponding to the case where the change display result is "off" and the change display mode of the rendering pattern is "non reach" is called a non reach change pattern (also referred to as "non reach change pattern"), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... are provided similarly to super reach. May be In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special map fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is set shorter than super reach α and super reach β which are super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, with regard to the special map fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is the super reach The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of α is executed.

  As described above, since the fluctuation display result is set to be “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high, so in the normal reach change pattern and the super reach change pattern As the fluctuation time is longer, the jackpot expectation is higher.

  In addition, as described later, for example, the type of non-reach type, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Although the variation patterns to be executed are not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the above, they are determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, random number values for variation pattern type determination are provided, and the variation pattern type is first from the random number values for these variation pattern type determination. Even if the fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, There.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 6 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 6B (for the first special symbol), and the big hit type shown in FIG. In addition to the judgment table (for the second special symbol), the small hit classification judgment table shown in FIG. 6 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the out of line fluctuation pattern judgment A table (not shown), a common drawing display result determination table (not shown), a common drawing variation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

  FIG. 6A is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In the display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is targeted for fluctuation display and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to the variable display, only the big hit can be won and the small hit is not generated.

  Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even when the subject is subject to variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values correspond to a small hit By being set as a judgment value, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, it will win a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 50% (100/200) .

  That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) when the value of the MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit shown in FIG. 6A. Also, if MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 6A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  Although the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6A, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately used. Provided, determination of the big hit is made using a common table in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special design designation buffer, small hit, small hit The determination may be made using separate tables for the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special feature designation buffer is the second.

  In addition, when the fluctuation special drawing specification buffer is 1st, the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is not to be won. However, a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit may be won.

  FIGS. 6B and 6C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among these, FIG. 6 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) Table. Also, FIG. 6 (C) shows the case of determining the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (ie when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) It is a table.

  The jackpot type determination table is one of the jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2) when it is judged that the variable display result is to be the jackpot symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In addition, as shown to FIG. 6 (B) and (C), while three types of big hit from big hit A to big hit C are provided in the big hit classification determination table (for 1st special symbol), In the big hit classification determination table (for the second special symbol), only one big hit of big hit C is provided. That is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the big hit that occurs when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed while being one of three types of big hits from the big hit A to the big hit C As a big hit that occurs in, it becomes only big hit C.

  FIG. 6D is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In addition, when the game ball passes the 3rd count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V prize big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit D is executed If the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E will be executed There is. That is, the big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit types determined by the random number value MR2 for the hit type determination extracted at the start winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of any of the small hits A and B Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not the third count switch 24B is passed.

  Here, the big hit type will be described using FIG. 6 (E). As the big hit type, big hit A and big hit D where time reduction control is not executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and time saving control after the big hit gaming state ends The jackpot B to be executed, the jackpot C and the jackpot E may be set.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D.

  The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In the time saving state, the probability of “per common” increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called continuous state which is likely to occur continuously without intervention.

  In addition, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, the ratio that the big hit game state continuously occurs without passing through the normal state (The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit as a result of the variation of the special feature game during the 20 special feature games and the percentage of occurrence of the big hit with the gaming ball winning V) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game end of the big hit C and the big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, the big hit gaming state is continuously without passing through the normal state. The rate of occurrence (the sum of the percentage that a big hit occurs as a result of fluctuating display of the special feature game during 100 special feature games and the percentage that the gaming ball wins V and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100% .

  In addition, although five types of big hit A-big hit E are provided as a big hit type, it is not limited to this, six or more types of big hit types may be provided, and four or less types are provided. It may be

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 are assigned to the jackpot A. , 150 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. For this reason, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, time saving control is not executed at the end of the big hit game at a rate of 50%. In addition, when time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit game, the number of special figure games for which time reduction control is performed is determined to be 20 times at a rate higher than 100 times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), all the ranges (0 to 299) out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are the jackpot C The number of special figure games for which time saving control is always executed is determined to be 100 times after the big hit game is over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, in the small hitting type judgment table, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the small hitting A, and 100 to 299 Is assigned to the small hit B. Therefore, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is set to 100 times at a rate of 75%. At the rate of 25%, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined, and the departure variation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “off” ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. In addition, when these judgment values indicate that the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", super reach β is easily determined, and when the type of big hit is "big hit A", super reach By assigning α so that it is easy to be determined, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that “big hit B” or “big hit C” will occur when the variation pattern of super reach β is executed. it can.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is a decision value within the range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as the variation pattern of the small hit.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach With respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 pending storages, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and a super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-4) of shortening, non-reach loss, corresponding fluctuation pattern (PA 2-1) of normal reach, fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation during time-saving control (PA2-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a determination value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the variation time of the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) is also shorter. The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) than in -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fluctuation display not being executed by lengthening the time of the fluctuation display.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source which is partially or entirely produced on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 7, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 7 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  In the first special view reserve storage unit 151A, although the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserve data of the special drawing game (the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is still started The reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the game balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  It should be noted that the game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103 Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, etc., and the random number for indicating the random value independently of the CPU 120 for effect control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes a wire for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5 and a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected.

  Also on the side of the effect control board 12, as in the case of the main board 11, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) The effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used, the display screen to be displayed in the notification of various errors (abnormality), the error notification patterns such as the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the output sound are stored There is. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit can update the state according to, for example, the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progression of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, the start winning buffer for performing the suspension storage display in the first suspension storage display area 5D and the second suspension storage display area 5U is set. The start winning buffer is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the first special view hold storage. In each storage area, data indicating the presence or absence of a start winning combination (specifically, “0” indicating that there is no starting winning combination and “1” indicating that there is a starting winning combination) is stored. In addition, data of these starting winning a prize buffers, production control which it mentions later in response to the reception of the 1st starting opening winning a prize specified command and the 2nd starting opening winning a specified command and the reception of the 1st fluctuation start command and the 2nd fluctuation start command While being updated in the pending display update process (S72, see FIG. 29) in the process processing, the pending in the first pending storage display area 5D and the second pending storage display area 5U based on the updated data of the start winning buffer Memory display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, a round white color is displayed on the holding storage display in the first holding storage display area 5D. When the first variation start command is received based on the fact that the first special figure variation is newly started while the display is newly added, the largest of the pending storage displays in the first pending storage display area 5D is selected. The reserve display is performed so that the high-order (first-time start-up reserve storage) round white display is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Update Similarly, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the holding storage display in the second holding storage display area 5U. When a second change start command is received based on the fact that the second special drawing is newly added, the topmost of the pending storage display in second pending storage display area 5U The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the first-time start-up winning storage) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Do.

  Here, the counting of the game balls on the main substrate 11 and the display of the feature ratio and the like will be described.

  The main substrate 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first start hole (hedge), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning hole (electric chew), the first big win The number of winning balls by winning in the mouth and the second big winning opening (attacker), the total number of winning balls are entered, and the display monitor 29 counts the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening in the total number of winning balls. (%) Which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in (Attacker), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the first big winning opening and It is to display a part ratio (%) which is a ratio occupied by the number of winning balls by the winning in the second big winning opening (attacker). The consecutive ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters obtained as described below) due to the winnings to the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker) ( It is a ratio that the following character acquisition ball number occupies. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is determined by the number of winning balls by winning on the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the winning on the second starting winning opening (electric chew) Prize balls from the winning balls (1st starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the winning balls, and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the 1st big winning a prize opening and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth (attacker) and the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth (electric thu) are the variable winning a prize, the passing possible width of the game ball fluctuates, winning of the game ball It is a feature whose assumed percentage changes. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  The information on the game winnings is summarized and the calculation method is the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) with 6000 winning balls (general winning balls), (2) The number of regular electric circuit prize balls which is the number of prize balls by winning in the start winning hole (electric chew), the prize by winning in the first large winning hole and the second large winning hole (attacker) The special electric circuit prize ball number (attacker prize ball number) which is the ball number is totaled. The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, a ratio (%) for 60000, and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls number) by winning in the 1st starting opening (Heso) and general winning opening (Sode) to be counted, the ordinary electric service prize ball number (electric chew award ball number), the special electric duty The number of winning balls (the number of attackers) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. That is, a considerable number (for example, several bytes) of storage for 11 sets of 6,000 sets is stored, and it is possible to calculate a running ratio (%) and a playing ratio (%) of their totals.

  The display monitor 29 switches and displays the ratio (%), the ratio (%), the ratio (%) of the cumulative total ratio, and the ratio (%) for every 6,000 pieces for every predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but the number of prize balls from the winning on the first starting hole (Heso) and the winning on the second starting winning hole (electric chew) are counted up as the game progresses The number of winning balls by the winnings to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying a ratio of 6,000 (%) is reflected in the ratio of 0000 (%) displayed after that, 6,000 will be displayed. Discrepancies may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) of 60000. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu), winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) If there is a prize ball number and a prize ball total number by entering and tabulation is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a ratio (%) for 6,000 pieces), such a discrepancy may occur. It can prevent.

  As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the character ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls is 42000 which is the sum of the number of winning balls and the number of prizes obtained by In the following description, the total winning ball number means the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the prize winning ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. Therefore, the coupling ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).

  Reciprocal ratio = [continuous character acquisition ball number / total acquisition number] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)

  In the case where the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42000, the character ratio can be obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 as 0.70 decimal places and discarding three digits. However, since the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not perform the calculation below the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  Although the total number of winning balls is 60000 in the above-described example, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly on the main substrate 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the employee or the like who is trying to visually recognize the main substrate 11 and the main substrate 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area where information on game winnings is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error processing or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error display or the warning display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case of performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with the decimal point must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated to be 57% of the part ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this case, the value calculated by the correct calculation is an error on the display There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, there is an error of + 0.3% at 32799/327 = 100.3%. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although an error of% is considered to be displayed, the ratio (%) (or a ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error also on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, the display ratio (%) and the link ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired spheres (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter. Even when the display is performed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the error may be large, by emitting light of a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio (%) and the ratio (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while displaying the duty ratio (%) for 30 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the ratio calculated according to it is reciprocated after 30 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a possibility that the values of the part ratio (%) and the continuous part (%) may be separated. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the duty ratio (%) and the coupling ratio (%).

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), the display can not be made 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 9A, although it is possible to display numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

  Although a sensor provided to each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won, the number of winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result, but the invention is limited thereto. Instead of using the attack medium, the game medium that has won the prize and the game medium that has won the electric chow are used together with a sensor provided after the discharge path is discharged, and based on the detection result, the number of balls obtained It is also possible to count the number of consecutive winnings acquired.

  Hereinafter, the display of the duty ratio will be described more specifically. The main substrate 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, besides the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In addition, although the form which totals the number of prizes of the 1st big winning a prize opening and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth (attacker) with the big prize number counter is illustrated, it is not limited to this, these 1st big prizes The first large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings to the mouth and the second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings for the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings for the first large winning opening And the number of winnings on the second big winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main substrate 11. The clear switch is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like can not easily operate. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the ratio and the duty ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch operated when the calculation of the ratio or the ratio can not be reperformed, for example, when there is a failure in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio. For this reason, it is a switch which does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal coupling ratio and a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to the data clear.

  As described above, the RTC 106 is provided on the main substrate 11, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial setting, but the RTC 106 can measure the operating time of the game arcade.

  The main substrate 11 is accommodated in the substrate case 201 as shown in FIG. 9A. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the substrate case 201. By providing the caulking pins 11 B, the main substrate 11 is completely sealed in the substrate case 201, and an illegal act on the main substrate 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

  Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 11. In addition, a sealing seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The sealing seal 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is interrupted, such as the front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  The display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D is configured by seven segments each including seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots disposed at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The display monitor 29 displays items of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The aggregation period is displayed on the first two display units 29A and 29B of the upper two digits, and numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D of lower two digits. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term duty ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the running ratio of the total cumulative total is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the ratio of the total cumulative running total is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for which the total cumulative total is determined means a total period after starting calculation of the ratio, combination ratio, or total ratio after resetting the calculation of the combination ratio or ratio once.

  In the above-mentioned example, although a continuation ratio and a part ratio are calculated irrespective of a game state, it may be calculated in consideration of a game state. For example, the ratio may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, the winning combination, the winning total number of balls, the winning combination of the total number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening during high base state and the big winning opening during the big hit gaming state It may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by

  When the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the first “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. Further, when the short-term linkage ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term linkage ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term part ratio of display No. 2 is displayed In the case where it is determined, the short-term-combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

  When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. Further, when the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. In the case where the ratio is displayed, the total display combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  The main substrate 11 uses the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to calculate the ratio and combination ratio. (4) The number of game balls entering into the general winning combination is counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 performs the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning port switch 26A to the fourth general A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 26D.

  In this switch process, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A, the value of the large winning number counter is added. When the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, By adding the values of the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, the number of game balls entered into each entry area ( To aggregate the winning number) of the sphere. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the steps for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch process, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the execution program. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening.

  The number of winning balls for each winning opening classified here is, as shown in FIG. 11, a general winning opening winning ball (a winning ball from a first general winning opening to a fourth general winning opening (Sode)), 1st start winning a prize winning ball (a winning ball by the winning a prize to the first starting winning a prize mouth (heso)), a regular electric circuit winning a prize ball (a winning a prize ball by a winning a prize to a electric chew), a special electric winning a prize ball (a winning a prize to the attacker The number of balls awarded by The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game ball wins to the general winning opening and the number of game ball wins to the first starting opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of winning game balls may be collected and counted. Also, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting mouth ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of first winning mouth balls The number of winning balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing these winning balls. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total sum and the total sum of the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area for each winning opening. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 x 256 x 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 pieces of data have a margin. It can be stored.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a continuous ratio storage area for storing a ratio of 10 sets and a total cumulative total ratio and a continuous ratio. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and combination ratio of 10 sets and total cumulative total by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to 10 sets and total cumulative total winning openings, 10 sets equivalent And storing the combination ratio of the total accumulation and the combination ratio in a combination ratio storage area. The combination ratio storage area storing 10 combinations and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination ratio are each configured by a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, in the case of storing the ratio and combination of 10 sets and the total total as integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1-byte counter with a margin.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 12, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (for example, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. Hereinafter the same)) 0000H to 2FBFH (2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101. Further, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area (for example, FE00H to FEBFH) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and data to the register via this register area. Write

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (for example, F000H to F3FFH) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 and write data to the RAM 102. I do. Note that other areas of the memory space (for example, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the RAM area (for example, 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, a nonuse area, a RAM data area, and other areas. . The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referred to by the above control program (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio is temporarily stored. For example, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area, a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio combination storage area for the total total are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other is stored.

  Note that 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-described data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) are stored. In the case of data of a byte count (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area.

  Further, the main substrate 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the ratio and ratio. Here, the main substrate 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 14A is a time chart showing display time of items displayed on the character ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 14A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the short-term continuous ratio display of Display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 14 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term continuity ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 1 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term duty ratio No. 2 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 14 (B-2), in the display of the short-term part ratio of display No. 2, the character of "y" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character of "7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display of display No 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative link ratio of display No 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 14 (B-3), the character of "A" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character of "6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, if the total cumulative link ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 3 is continued for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 14 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in the display of the total-cumulative combination of display No. 4 Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 4 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 14 (B-5). Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the total of the combination of short-term combination of display No. 2 to display No. 4 is red. As described above, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, and the total-cum-combination ratio every 30 seconds.

  In the main substrate 11, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the storage area of the sum total and the total accumulation for 10 sets, the combination ratio storage area storing the combination ratio of 10 sets and the total accumulation, and the transmission ratio is respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th memory area to the 9th memory area is “27” “81” “120” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is “27”, “81” “ Update to "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Further, the number of winning balls in the zeroth storage area is set to "0", and the number of winning balls in the tenth storage area is erased.

  When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initialization, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply substrate is started, the data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. The data used to display the ratio and ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 102 are cleared by operating the clear switch. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. Switch 22B, first count switch 23, second count switch 24A, third count switch 24B, fourth count switch 24C, first general winning opening switch 26A, second general winning opening switch 26B, third general winning opening switch 26C The state of the detection signal input from the various switches such as the fourth general winning opening switch 26D is determined, and the addition to the winning counter corresponding to each switch is executed (S11).

  Subsequently, when a winning occurs, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, the first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening When there is an input of a detection signal from the switch 26B, the third general prize winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general prize winning opening switch 26D, the prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize based on each detection signal Execute (S12).

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information process (S13) for calculating winning information such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio, and a winning information for displaying winning information such as the winning ratio and the losing ratio calculated in the winning information processing on the display monitor 29. An information display control process (S14) is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (S15), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, payout information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. To do (S16).

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main substrate 11 side is executed (S17) . Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S18). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning winning ball unit 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (S19). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 6B Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S20). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  The contents of various processes in the game control timer interrupt process will be described below.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the winning information processing. As shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 determines whether an abnormal operation has been detected in the winning information processing (S301). Whether or not the abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not the clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (S301; Y), warning display preparation is performed (S302), and the process proceeds to S303. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (S301; N), the winning information is acquired (S303). The winning information is any one of the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. It is acquired by detecting a game ball by.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the current time is within business hours (S304). It is measured and determined by the RTC 106 whether or not the current time is within business hours. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (S304; Y), it is judged from the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 whether the glass door frame 3a is closed (S305).

  As a result, when a signal is not output from the door opening sensor 90 and the glass door frame 3a is closed (S305; Y), the gaming ball has won more than a predetermined number of balls in the attacker per unit time. It is determined whether or not there is (S306). As the unit time and the predetermined number of balls here, numerical values are set assuming a state in which it is impossible to win in a normal game. Specifically, since the firing of the game balls is 100 shots for a maximum of 1 minute, for example, it can be appropriately determined with an upper limit of 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is five when the unit time is one second, or thirty when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 106. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of detected game balls by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the gaming ball has not won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time (S306; N), a winning ball number adding process for adding the number of winning balls according to the winning information obtained in S303 Perform (S307). In addition, a prize ball number addition process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the winning information processing is finished as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general prize winning opening (Sode), the general prize winning opening (Heso), the ordinary electric utility prize ball (electric chow), and the special electric symbol prize ball (attacker) in the 0th memory area shown in FIG. Each prize ball number is added.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition processing, the general winning opening (Sode), the general winning opening (Heso), the ordinary electric service winning ball (electric chow), the special electric symbol winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Calculate the total number of balls for each number of balls. Here, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer = 0) (S308). As a result, when the calculation timer has not timed out (S308; N), the winning information processing ends. If the calculation timer is up (S308; Y), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (S309).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by adding in S307 is the calculation execution number (S310). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, and for example, a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The total number of winning balls can be slightly less than 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number be a number slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number of balls from 6,000.

  As a result, when the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) is not the calculated execution number (S310; N), the winning information processing is finished as it is. In addition, when the number of winning balls is the calculation execution number (S310; Y), the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio are calculated (S311). Here, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative connection ratio), and the cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative combination ratio) are respectively calculated. For this reason, the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. Thereafter, a combination ratio / combination ratio display process is performed (S312), and the winning information processing is ended.

  If it is determined in S304 that it is not within business hours (S304; N), if it is determined in S305 that the glass door frame 3a is not closed (S305; N), the gaming ball is sent to the attacker per unit time in S306. When it is determined that the predetermined number of balls or more has been won (S306; Y), an error display preparation is performed (S313). Thereafter, the winning information processing ends.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning information display control process (S14). As shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 first determines whether preparation for displaying a ratio / combination ratio has been completed (S321). If it is determined that the consecutive ratio / combination ratio display preparation process has not been completed (S321; N), it is determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (S322).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (S322; Y), the error display is performed (S323). Error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. In addition, when error display is performed, a predetermined error display may be performed on another display device, for example, the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, etc. The lamp 9 may be lighted or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main substrate 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the error display is performed, it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (S324). In addition, if it is determined in S322 that it is not determined whether the error display preparation is completed (S322; N), it is also determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (S324).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (S324; Y), the warning display is performed (S325). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked to indicate that a warning is made, or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29. Thus, it is preferable that the warning display be performed in a more prominent manner than the other displays.

  In addition, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on the second special symbol display 4B, etc., on another display device, such as the effect display 5, the first special symbol display 4A, or the game The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or off in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the main substrate 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these. In addition, when another error display or the like is performed on the effect display device 5, it is preferable to perform a warning display so as not to erase the displayed error display.

  When the warning is displayed, the ratio / combination ratio control process is ended. Further, if it is determined in S324 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (S324; N), the coupled ratio / combination ratio control process is ended.

  Further, when it is judged that preparation of the ratio display / combination ratio display is completed (S 321; Y), short-term connection ratio display is performed (S 326). Subsequently, it is determined whether the short-term continuous ratio display has been started and a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S327). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S327; N), the process returns to S326, and the short-term continuous ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S327; Y), the process proceeds to S328. Thus, the short-term continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, the short-term-combination ratio display is performed (S328), and it is determined whether the short-term-combination ratio display is started and a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S329). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S329; N), the process returns to S328, and the short-term-combination ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S329; Y), the process proceeds to S330. Thus, the short-term duty ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, a cumulative linkage ratio display is performed (S330), and it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the cumulative linkage ratio display is started (S331). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S331; N), the process returns to S330 and continues the cumulative linkage ratio display. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S331; Y), the process proceeds to S332. Thus, the cumulative ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, cumulative ratio display is performed (S332), and it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative ratio display was started (S333). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S333; N), the process returns to S332, and the cumulative winning combination ratio display is continued. Thus, the short-term duty ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S333; Y), the coupled ratio / combination ratio control process is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative connection ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio are displayed by the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 11 for controlling the game so as not to hinder the visibility. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the game nail (obstacle nail), the windmill, etc. provided on the game board 2.

  Further, the display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main substrate 11 when it is viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being disturbed. Further, the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position where the heat dissipation hole provided in the substrate case 201 is not directly in front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being obscured by the heat radiation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being disturbed.

  Further, the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position not overlapping with the peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 11. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 can be prevented from being obscured by the peripheral substrate such as the effect control substrate 12 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 11 from being disturbed.

  Further, on the display monitor 29, it is possible to display a ratio or a part ratio relating to the relationship between the winning balls paid out by passing the electric chew and the attacker and the winning balls paid out by passing the general winning opening. . Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term connection ratio and a cumulative connection ratio for each predetermined period. For this reason, since it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying the information about a several period, it can contribute to the reduction of a number of parts.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 displays a ratio (short-term ratio) or a ratio (short-term ratio) every 6,000 winning balls, so that the total winning balls become 6,000, etc. A numerical value of a period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of winning balls is 6,000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of winning balls is 1,000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of winning balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as one hour, three hours, or ten hours.

  Further, the display monitor 29 switches and displays a cumulative ratio and a cumulative combination ratio in addition to a combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) and a combination ratio (short-term combination ratio) every time the number of winning balls reaches 6,000. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio with the predetermined combination of units, the cumulative connection ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the like. In addition, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 11 housed in the crimped substrate case 201. For this reason, it can contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that can not display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside the business hours of the game, counting the number of winning balls during the opening of the glass door frame 3a, and winning the gaming balls exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The pachinko gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the game arcade, and counting the prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to play a game by closing the door frame, and counting the prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be a fraud.

  In addition, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is playing, the gaming balls can not be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, the number of shots of the game ball is 100 for a maximum of one minute. For this reason, the upper limit number of winning game balls in one minute is about 100. Therefore, for example, when winning of 100 game balls per minute or more than 20 game balls is detected in 12 seconds, the probability of having a fraudulent action becomes extremely high.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, the prize when the game ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time It excludes the addition of the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the falsification of information on the ratio and proportions due to the fraud. It should be noted that the fraud may be detected based on the number of balls paid out per unit time, instead of the number of balls won when the gaming ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko gaming machine 1, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is erased. . Therefore, the ring buffer can be prevented from running out of capacity.

  In the ring buffer, the first storage area to the tenth storage area are provided, and when the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area is It is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is in units of predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, data remaining without being erased can be increased.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, data in the tenth storage area may be erased to move data in the ninth storage area, or data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, in the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented, and the coupling ratio and the duty ratio can be calculated with a large amount of data.

  When the data in the ring buffer is erased, not only the data in the tenth storage area but also all the data in the first to tenth storage areas may be erased. . In this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the start of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased first, and then part of data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but some or all of the data in the storage area other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total sum, is similarly erased. May be

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, each data of the short-term running ratio, the short-term playing ratio, the cumulative running ratio, and the cumulative running ratio is displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The period of displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Or, it may be every hour. Further, the data to be displayed may be data other than the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative connection ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio data, or may be only a part of these data.

  In addition, when displaying the data of short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, cumulative connection ratio, and cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term connection ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. For this reason, it can be made to recognize that new data are displayed from a short-term connection ratio.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an abnormal operation is performed, a warning display is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio of parts. When this switch is operated, it is possible to falsify the data of connection ratio and duty ratio, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, it is possible to suppress the fraud such as falsification of data.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main side error processing (S15). In the main side error processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the abnormality informing timer indicating that the abnormality informing is being performed in the predetermined period on the side of the effect control board 12 is in operation (S401)

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not in operation (S401; N), the process proceeds to S402. If the alarming timer is operating (S401; Y), the process proceeds to S420, and the alarming timer is decremented by one, and whether or not the alarming timer after subtraction is counted up. It determines (S421).

  If the abnormality notifying timer is not up (S421; N), the process proceeds to S402. On the other hand, if the abnormality informing timer is up (S421; Y), after the informing of abnormality is cleared (S422), the process proceeds to S402.

  In S402, abnormality determination processing for determining the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is performed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode for determining an error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19, but the present invention is not limited to this. The type and number of these errors (abnormalities) It may be set appropriately according to the model and specifications.

  As shown in FIG. 19, each error (abnormality) of 1 to 15 is set, and in the abnormality determination processing, occurrence of each error (abnormality) of 1 to 15 can be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 19, priority levels are set for these errors (abnormalities), and in principle, errors (abnormalities) with high priorities are notified with priority.

  These errors include, for example, an error due to a short circuit abnormality of the switch power supply that supplies the power of the apparatus, such as a switch common short circuit error of priority "1", detection of electromagnetic waves by the radio wave sensor 70, and magnetic force by the magnetic sensor 60. Of the device (switch) or an error such as detection error of the first count switch 23 or the second count switch 24A, etc. There is no possibility that the game is incorrect such as a full tank error or an out-of-ball error, but there is an error or the like that causes a problem in the progress of the game.

  Also, for each error, a condition for canceling the error that has occurred is set, and for errors with relatively high priority, "power off" is mainly taken as the cancellation condition. For an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority, it is a cancellation condition that a predetermined time elapses or the state of the error is canceled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the error (abnormality) includes an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state and an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state which is the predetermined state. A relatively high priority error is considered as an error (abnormality) controlled to the gaming stop state, and a relatively low priority error (abnormal) is considered as an error (abnormality) not controlled to the gaming stop state .

  Note that among these errors, there are errors that differ depending on the time of detection even if they are errors caused by the same sensor. For example, as an error when abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80, abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 when the first special variable winning ball device 7A or the second special variable winning ball device 7B is activated. Is determined to be a high vibration detection 1 error with a priority of "6" and controlled to the game stop state until the power is turned off, whereas the first special variable winning ball device 7A and the second special variable winning When abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 at the time of operation of the ball device 7B, it is determined that the priority is "11" and the vibration detection 2 error is low, and the game is not controlled to be stopped after 60 seconds. The error is to be cleared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the output mode of the security signal is set to each error (abnormality), and each error (abnormality) is determined when the occurrence of each error (abnormality) is determined. The security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a mode corresponding to the above. It should be noted that the security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) in which the game is stopped is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority is output. , Or is not output at a predetermined time after the error determination. In addition, with regard to the “incorrect prize error” of priority “10”, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a predetermined time (4 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on again. Is set as.

  As described above, in the abnormality determination processing, the CPU 103 detects the magnetic sensor 60, the radio wave sensor 70, the vibration sensor 80, the door opening sensor 90, the first winning prize opening door sensor 91, and the second winning prize opening connected to the main substrate 11. Based on the detection state of the door sensor 92, the full tank sensor 93, the ball out sensor 94, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball of the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, etc. Each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is determined.

  Then, after the abnormality determination processing of S402 is performed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination processing (S403), and the occurrence of the abnormality is not determined (S403; N) End main side error processing.

  On the other hand, when the occurrence of an abnormality is determined (S403; Y), whether or not an abnormality informing flag indicating that abnormality notification is being executed is set, that is, whether or not the abnormality has already been notified. It is determined (S404).

  If the abnormality informing flag is not set (S404; N), the process proceeds to S410, sets the abnormality informing flag and the abnormality informing timer, and stores an error (abnormality) to start the informing, It progresses to S411.

  If, for example, an error (abnormality) to start notification is a vibration detection 2 error, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set in the abnormal notification-in-progress timer, and an error (abnormality) to start notification (starting opening) 2) If the error is an abnormal winning error, a timer value corresponding to 300 seconds is set. However, if the error (abnormality) for starting the notification is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, “0” is set to the abnormality informing timer. As a result, it is determined in S401 that the abnormality notification in-progress timer is not in operation, and thus the set abnormality notification in-progress flag is set until the power is turned off. In other words, for errors corresponding to these "power off" cancellation conditions, the error notification is continued until the power is turned off, so the abnormality informing flag is not cleared until the power is turned off. It is supposed to be. In the case of a prize ball abnormality error where it is determined that the number of prize balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the game is not controlled to the gaming stop state, so an error is notified in a state where the game is possible.

  If the abnormality informing flag is set (S404; Y), the abnormality in informing is identified from the data of the informing abnormality stored in S410 (S405), and the error determined in S402 (abnormality) It is determined whether or not it is the same as the error (abnormality) during notification (S406).

  If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is the same as the error (abnormality) during notification (S406; Y), the main side error processing ends. On the other hand, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not the same as the error (abnormality) in notification (S406; N), the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is higher than the error (abnormality) in notification It is determined whether or not it is a priority error (abnormal) (S407). If the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) in notification (S407; N), the main side error processing is ended. Therefore, if the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is not an error (abnormality) with higher priority than an error (abnormality) during notification, the step of S413 is executed and an error designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12. Since no notification is sent, the notification of the error (abnormality) is not executed, and the notification of the error (abnormality) in the notification is continued.

  On the other hand, when the error (abnormality) determined in S402 is an error (abnormality) with a higher priority than the error (abnormality) during notification (S407; Y), it further indicates a gaming stop state which is a predetermined state. It is determined whether the game stop flag is set (S408).

  If the game stop flag is set (S408; Y), that is, if the game is in the stop state, the main side error processing is ended. Therefore, when the game is stopped, even if an error (abnormality) higher in priority than an error (abnormality) during notification is determined in S402, the step of S413 or the step of S414 is executed. Since no new error specification command is sent to the effect control board 12 because there is no, notification of an error (abnormality) during notification will be continued, and the output of the security signal during output will change ( There is no chance to turn on / off the signal.

  On the other hand, when the game stop flag is not set (S408; N), that is, when it is not in the game stop state, the process proceeds to S409, resets the abnormality informing timer and resets the error in notification (abnormality) Update and memorize. If the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) during notification determined in S402 is an error corresponding to the release condition of “power off”, as in the case of S410 described above, the error is abnormal. By setting “0” to the timer during notification, the abnormality notification flag is set until the power is turned off.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in the notification determined in S402 is an error corresponding to the game stop (S411), and if it is not an error corresponding to the game stop ( In S411; N), the process proceeds to S413 without passing through S412. If it is an error corresponding to the game stop (S411; Y), the launch control board is set to stop the launch, and the launch of the game ball from the hit ball launch device is disabled, and the game stop flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S413.

  In S413, an error designating command for designating the occurrence of an error (abnormality) different from the error (abnormality) in the notification determined in S402 is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12, and then the error (abnormality is detected) Setting to output the security signal in the output mode corresponding to (S 414), and the main side error processing is ended. By setting the output of the security signal in S414, the security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to an external device such as a hall computer in the information output process (S16).

  Note that the error designation command transmitted and set in S413 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S20. Then, in the effect control board 12, an error notification process (see FIG. 30) to be described later is executed, whereby an error notification corresponding to the error (abnormality) specified by the transmitted error designation command is performed. Ru.

  As described above, the main side error processing described above is performed on the main substrate 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the error notification processing (see FIG. 30) described later is performed on the effect control substrate 12 as shown in FIG. As shown in 20, the execution mode of the error notification differs depending on whether the gaming state is the gaming stop state where the predetermined state is.

  Specifically, for example, when occurrence of a vibration detection 2 error shown in FIG. 19 is first determined in the playable state, occurrence of the vibration detection 2 error is as shown in FIG. 21 (A). In addition, a pop-up window of “E-54 vibration error” corresponding to the vibration detection 2 error is notified by being displayed on the effect display device 5 for 60 seconds which is a predetermined time.

  When the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the vibration detection 2 error, the priority of the prize ball abnormality error is “7”, and the priority of the vibration detection 2 error being executed is Since it is higher than “11” which is the “E-54 vibration error” pop-up window notifying the vibration detection 2 error being executed, notification of the prize ball abnormality error, specifically, FIG. As shown in A), a pop-up window including a message "Please call a staff member! E-33 Prize ball abnormality error Please turn on the power again" is displayed to notify that a prize ball abnormality error has occurred. However, in the occurrence of the prize ball abnormal error, the game is not controlled to the stopped state, and the game available state is maintained.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), when occurrence of “Magnetic error” which is an error having higher priority than the prize ball abnormality error is determined during notification of the prize ball abnormality error, The entire display on the effect display device 5 is displayed in black, indicating that the game is stopped, and also call the staff on the effect display device 5 “during game stoppage! E-02 Magnet error Re-enter the power supply Since the display of “Please do it” is displayed in white characters, occurrence of “Magnetic error” is notified, and also, it is notified that an error (abnormality) at which the game is stopped is a magnet error.

  Then, after the game stopped state as described above, the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, which is an error having a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stopped state. In this case, as described above, since the game stop flag is set even if the occurrence of the "radio wave error" is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the determination of the "radio wave error" is not transmitted. As shown in FIG. 21 (B), these "game errors" are continued by the notification of "magnet error" which is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state being continued without the notification of the "radio wave error" being executed. It is not possible to specify what kind of error is the error triggered by the state control, and it is an error triggered by the control of these game suspension states that it is appropriate for fraud using a magnet It is possible to prevent the Do corresponding becomes impossible.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of "radio wave error" is an error that has a higher priority than the "magnet error" that is triggered to be controlled to the game stop state after entering the game stop state. As described above, since the step of S 414 is not executed, that is, the output of the security signal corresponding to the “radio wave error” whose occurrence is determined is limited, the security signal corresponding to the “magnet error” being output Does not change (ON / OFF of the signal), and it becomes difficult to confirm an error (abnormality) that triggered the output of these security signals on the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a hall computer etc. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 9 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S31 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, it is determined whether there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B, and if there is a winning, the variation display result determination The random number value MR1 for the main hit, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are extracted, and if it is the first start winning combination, the free entry in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A. In the case of the second start winning combination, it is stored in the top of the empty entry in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B.

  The special symbol normal processing of S22 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol is displayed based on the presence / absence of the pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 151A or the second special view pending storage unit 151B. It is determined whether the special drawing game is started by the display 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the variable display result derives whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is "big hit". Make a decision (pre-decision) before it is displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B (big hit symbol or A small hit symbol, one of an off symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern can be selected from any of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It includes the process of deciding whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing of S23, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random symbol value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. A process of determining the variable display mode is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S24 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol indicator 4A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol indicator 4B. It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S25 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit”, etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". It is also good. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the 1st big winning a prize opening state to “29 seconds”, the opening frequency of the 1st big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit frequency which executes the round, The setting of jackpot status is performed by setting “5 times” for “big hit A”, “10 times” for “big hit B”, and “15 times” for “big hit C”. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S27 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "5". In this big hit open process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the first big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. The process includes determining whether it is time to return the first big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When the first big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the first big winning opening door 701 is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is “6 Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of S28 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit end processing, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, and a process of performing various settings (setting of a time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit end process, the type of the big hit that has been executed is specified. Then, if the specified jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0” without setting the time saving flag. If the specified jackpot type is "big hit B", set the time-shortening flag and set the initial count value (eg "20") corresponding to "big hit B" in the time reduction counter and the value of the special process process flag Is updated to "0". Also, if the specified big hit type is "big hit C", set the time reduction flag and set the initial count value (eg "100") corresponding to "big hit C" in the time reduced number counter and set the special view process flag Update the value of to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this small hit opening pre-processing, setting to start the execution of the round in the small hit gaming state and open the second big winning opening based on the variable display result becoming “small hit” etc. Processing etc. are included. At this time, based on, for example, the variable display result being "small hit", the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening is opened is set to "one second", and the upper limit number of times to execute the round The setting of the small hit state may be performed by setting the opening number of the second large winning opening to "one time". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8".

  In the small hit state, the number of opening of the second big winning opening is set to "one time", and the upper limit of the period during which the second big winning opening is opened is set to "1 second". The number of opening times of the second large winning opening in the small hitting state may be two or more times, and the upper limit of the period in which the second large winning opening is opened is the game. It may be a period other than "one second" as long as the ball can win a prize at the second big winning opening.

  The small hit open processing of S30 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". This small hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the second big winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch 24A, etc. And a process of determining whether it is time to return the second big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When the second big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 83 for the second big winning opening door 711 is executed, and the value of the special processing process flag is "9 Is updated to

  The small hitting end processing of S31 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". The small hit end process corresponds to a period in which ending effect as a rendering operation is performed to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes waiting for waiting time to elapse. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (S141). The second special figure reservation storage number is the number of pending storages of the special drawing game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the process of S141, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than "0" at S141 (S141; N), the second special view suspension storage unit 151B stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S142). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S142, the second special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the second special view pending storage count count value or the total pending storage count count value and updating it. As well as updating the data in the second special view storage section 151B. Specifically, random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") in second special view hold storage unit 151B are used. The pending data indicated is shifted upward by one entry (S143).

  Thereafter, the variation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special drawing designation buffer is updated to "2" (S144), and then the process proceeds to S149.

  On the other hand, when the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at S141 (S141; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (S145). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of S145, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is “0”. Good. Thus, the process of S145 is executed when it is determined in S141 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. Determine if As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to the one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  When the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" at S145 (S145; N), the first special view suspension storage unit 151A stores the suspension data corresponding to the suspension number "1". The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out respectively (S146). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S146, the first special view pending storage count and the total pending storage count are decremented by 1, etc. As well as updating the data of the first special view reservation storage unit 151A. Specifically, random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries under the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers “2” to “4”) in first special view hold storage unit 151A are used. The pending data indicated is shifted upward by one entry (S147).

  Thereafter, the variation special drawing designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special drawing designation buffer is updated to “1” (S 148), and then the process proceeds to S 149.

  In S149, it is shown in FIG. 6 (A) as a use table for determining which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off” the special figure display result which is a variable symbol display result of the special symbol. Select and set the display result judgment table. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to each special view display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "off" In comparison with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit", or "off" (S150).

  After the special view display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S151). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S153). At this time, when the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is “1”, the CPU 103 selects and sets the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6B, and specifies the variation special figure When the value of the buffer is “2”, the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6C may be selected and set. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination stored in the variable random number buffer by referring to the big hit type determination table thus set is "big hit A", "big hit B" in the big hit type determination table. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each of the "big hit C" big hit types, it is determined which of the multiple types the big hit type is to be (S154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, either time-saving state when time single-out control (time-saving control) is performed, or normal state when time-saving control is not performed Whether to control to the game state is determined before the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S156. As an example, if the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, if “big hit B”, “1”, and if “big hit C”, “2” may be set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not made in S151 (S151; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the special map display result is "small hit" (S151a). If it is determined to be "small hit" (S151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S151a). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 6D) is selected and set as a use table for determining the small hit type as any of a plurality of types (S 151 c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “small hit A”, “small hit A” in the small hit type determination table. Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each small hit type of the small hit B ", the small hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S151 d).

  Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, it is determined, for example, by setting the small hit type buffer value which is the storage value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S151e) The small hit type is stored and the process proceeds to S156. As an example, the small hit type buffer value may be set to “0” if the small hit type is “small hit A”, and may be set to “1” if “small hit B”.

  In S156, as a result of determining in advance whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is set), as a result of determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, further to the small hit gaming state In accordance with the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set), the finalized special symbol is set. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" which becomes an out symbol is set as a finalized special symbol corresponding to a preliminary determination result indicating that the special image display result is "off". In addition, if it is determined in S151 that the special view display result is "big hit", the big hit symbol is "3", "5", or "7" according to the big hit type determination result in S154. Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is set as the determined special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is "big hit A". Moreover, according to the determination result which makes a big hit classification "big hit B", the special symbol which shows the number of "5" is set as a confirmation special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number “7” is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the big hit type is “big hit C”. In addition, in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the special figure display result is "small hit", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2" to be a small hit symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S156, the special symbol process processing is updated to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (S157), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  In S145, when the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (S145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (S158), the special symbol usually End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B. Control for deriving and displaying a symbol is performed (S181). In addition, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special figure, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is ended, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (S 182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183), and if the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S189a.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the time short flag if the time short flag is set (S184), and the big hit stored in the effect control board 12 Depending on the type, settings are made to transmit a hit start 1 designated command (big hit A), a hit start 2 assigned command (big hit B), and a hit start 3 assigned command (big hit C) (S185). The hit start designation command set in S185 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designating command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 5) is set in the big hit display time timer (S187). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times in the case of big hit A, 10 times in case of big hit B, and 15 times in case of big hit C) is set in the special winning opening open frequency counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S189), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, in S189a, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set (S189a). If the small hit flag is not set (S189a; Y), the process proceeds to S190. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (S 189 a; Y), the CPU 103 selects one of the start command 4 (small hit A), which corresponds to the type of small hit stored in the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the start 5 designation command (small hit B) is performed (S 189 b). The hit start designation command set in S189b is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 5) (S 189 c). In addition, the number of opening (for example, once in the case of a small hit) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S 189 d). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S189e), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. If the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S196.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, if it is a high base state (time reduction state) in which time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1. (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S193). If it is not "0" (S193; N), the process proceeds to S196 and the value of the time reduction counter is "0." If it is "" (S193; Y), the game state corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag (specifically, the low base state (normally, normal state) after clearing the time saving flag to end time saving control (S194) After the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the state) is performed (S195), the process proceeds to S196. In S196, after updating the value of the special drawing process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 22 as the small hit start pre-processing. In the small hit start pre-processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (S201), and determines whether the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S202; N), while the small hit opening pre-processing is ended, if the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202; Y), the second big winning game A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, one second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (S203). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit open processing (S30) (S204), and the small hit open pre-processing is ended.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S30 of FIG. 22 as the small hit open process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the open time timer by 1 ( S211). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (S212).

  If the open time timer has timed out (S212; Y), the process proceeds to S230, and if the open time timer has not timed out (S212; N), whether or not it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening Is determined (S213). When it is the opening timing of the second large winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S214). Then, transmission setting of the special winning opening open designation command corresponding to the round is performed (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S215 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the opening timing of the second big winning opening (S213; N), it proceeds to S216 without passing through S214 and S215.

  In S216, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S216). If it is the closing timing of the second large winning opening (S216; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S217) . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the special winning opening corresponding to the round is set (S218), and the process shifts to S223. Note that the special winning opening open designation command for which transmission setting has been performed in S218 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big winning opening (S216; N), it proceeds to S223 without passing through S217 and S218.

  In S223, the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223). When the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S223; N), the small hit open processing is ended, and when the third count switch 24B is turned on (S223; Y), the third count switch 24B is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 24B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S224). If the V prize flag is set (S224; Y), the small hitting open processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S224; N), the V prize flag is set (S225) .

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 12 (S227). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. In addition, if the second large winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second large winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 711 (S228), and the opening time is The timer is cleared (S229).

  Then, in S230, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "9" which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (S31) (S230), and ends the small hit open processing.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S31 of FIG. 22 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit end display timer is in operation. Is determined (S231). If the small hit end display timer is not in operation (S231; N), the small hit flag is cleared (S232), and transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit to the effect control board 12 is performed (S233 ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (S234), and the small hit end process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (S231; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S235). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small hit end display timer has timed out (S236). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (S236; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237). If the third count switch 24B is not turned on (S237; N), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the third count switch 24B is turned on (S237; Y), the third count is already performed. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the switch 24B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the third count switch, is set (S238). If the V prize flag is set (S238; Y), the small hitting end processing is ended, and if the V prize flag is not set (S238; N), the V prize flag is set (S239).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the V prize notification command to the effect control board 12 (S241), and ends the small hitting end process. The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

  When the small hit end display time has elapsed in S236 (S236; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (S242). When the V prize flag is set (S 242; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big hit flag (S 243, S 244). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type from the “big hit D” and the “big hit E” based on the small hit type in which the V prize is generated (S246). As the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 6D, when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined as "big hit D", and the V winning type concerned If the type of small hit that occurred is "small hit B", the type of big hit is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S247), the jackpot type determined It memorizes, it advances to S248. As an example, if the big hit type is "big hit D", the big hit type buffer value may be "3", and if "big hit E", it may be "4".

  After execution of S247, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S248), and ends the small hit end processing.

  That is, since the game ball passes the third count switch 24B in the period until the small hit end display time after the small hit game ends as well as during the small hit game, the small hit game ends Even if the game ball has won the second big winning opening just before, the game ball will pass the third count switch 24B so that the big hit game will be executed after the end of the small hit end processing There is.

  If the V prize flag is not set in S 242 (S 242; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S 22) ( S249), the small hitting end processing ends.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 5.

  Next, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56).

  Then, after the error notification process (S57) shown in FIG. 30 is executed, the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit A pending display update process for updating to the current display is executed (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the processes in S73 to S82 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S74).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S75).

  During the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern confirmation command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77), the small hit display process (S80) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S78).

  During the big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S79).

  Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Small hitting display process (S80): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hitting on the effect display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game in-progress process (S81).

  Small hit in game processing (S81): Control of small hit in game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (S82).

  Small hit end effect processing (S82): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73) or the big hit display process (S77).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the error notification process (S57). In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the error notification timer is in operation (S501).

  If the error informing timer is not in operation, that is, if the error informing is not performed, the process proceeds to S502.

  On the other hand, if the error informing timer is in operation, that is, if the error informing is being executed, the error informing timer after timer subtraction is decremented by one after the error informing timer is decremented by one (S510). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S511).

  If the timer is not up during error notification (S511; N), the process proceeds to S502 without passing through S512 and S513.

  On the other hand, if the error notification in-process timer is up (S511; Y), the error notification in-progress flag is cleared (S512), and the error notification in progress is ended (S513), and the process proceeds to S502.

  In S502, it is determined whether the error designation command reception flag is set. The error designation command reception flag is set in the command analysis processing when the command transmitted from the main board 11 is specified in the command analysis processing (S54) as the error designation command.

  If the error designation command reception flag is not set (S502; N), the error notification process is ended. On the other hand, when the error designation command reception flag is set (S502; Y), the set error designation command reception flag is cleared (S503), and the error designation command stored in the error designation command storage area is The error type is specified from (specifically, the value of EXT) (S504), and the notification mode set for the specified error type, specifically, the content to be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the game effect The lighting mode of the lamp 9 and the voice to be output are specified (S505), and the error notification is started in the specified notification mode (S506).

  Next, an error type identified in S504 is an error having a notification period, for example, a vibration detection 2 error in which 60 seconds is set as a release period (notification period), or 300 seconds as a release period (notification period) It is determined whether or not there is a starting opening 2 abnormal winning error or the like.

  If the error type is an error having a notification period (S507; Y), a value corresponding to the notification period is set to the error notification informing timer together with the error notification informing flag, and the timer notification timer timer count is started. The error notification process ends. As a result, the notification of the error started in S506 ends when the timer in the error notification is up.

  On the other hand, when the error type is not an error having a notification period (S507; N), only the error notification in progress flag is set, and the error notification processing is ended without starting the timer count of the error notification in progress timer. As a result, since the timer informing error notification is not determined to be in operation in S501 described above, the notification of the error started in S506 is continued until the next error designation command is received.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an error (abnormality) is newly determined when the game is stopped due to the error (abnormality) determination as the predetermined state, the determined error (abnormality) Even if the priority of is higher than the priority of the error (abnormality) during notification, the notification of the previous error (abnormality) is continued, so the error (abnormality) that triggered the game stop state becomes difficult to check Can prevent the appropriate response from becoming impossible.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 19, a plurality of errors (abnormalities) are set as errors (abnormalities) controlled to the game stop state, and thus more game stop states and The occurrence of an abnormality can be determined.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko game provided with the second special variable winning ball device 7B which is a big hit advantageous to the player by the game ball passing (enter) the third count switch 24B which is a specific area In the case where the abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 80 at the time of opening the second large winning opening door 711 of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the machine 1, the vibration detection 1 high priority "6" 1 Since it is determined to be an error and controlled to the game stop state, it is possible to determine that an error (abnormality) occurs as a fraud that causes the gaming ball to pass (enter) the third count switch 24B by vibration.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the above-described main side error processing will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration other than the main side error processing is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the embodiment described above, the occurrence of an error (abnormality) is determined even in the game stop state which is a predetermined state, but by limiting the notification of the occurrence of the determined error (abnormality) In the first modification shown in FIG. 31, although it is made to prevent that the error (abnormality) which became a trigger of the game stop state which is a predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm, it becomes a game stop state In addition, by not executing the main side error processing itself including the abnormality determination processing that determines the occurrence of an error (abnormality), it is limited so that the determination of the occurrence of a new error (abnormality) is not performed. It is made to prevent that the error (abnormality) which became a trigger of the game stop state which is a predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, in the first step of the main side error processing, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is set, and the game stop flag is set (S400; Y) In the case where the main side error processing is ended and the game stop flag is not set (S400; N), the processing after S401 may be executed.

  The processes after S401 are the same as those of the embodiment described above except for the process of step S408, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, according to the above-described modification 1, since the determination of a new error (abnormality) is limited regardless of the priority in the game stop state which is the predetermined state, the game which is in the predetermined state It is possible to prevent an abnormality that is triggered to be controlled to stop from becoming difficult to check.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the above-described error notification processing will be described based on FIG. The configuration other than the error notification processing is the same as that of the embodiment described above except for the main side error processing. However, the data for specifying the priority of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. 19 is stored so as to be readable by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the embodiment described above, the priority of the error (abnormality) newly determined in the main side error processing is identified, and the identified priority is higher than the error (abnormality) in the notification. It is determined whether or not the priority is higher than the error (abnormality) in the notification, and the error control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (the CPU 120 for effect control). Although the embodiment in which the determination or the determination based on the comparison or the comparison is not performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main side error processing in the above-described embodiment, the step S407 is not executed. Regardless of the occurrence of an error (abnormality) is determined to perform transmission setting of the error designation command, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) side, the error shown in FIG. By executing the knowledge processing, the performance control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) side, may be a determination due newly priority identification and comparison of the determined error (abnormality).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 32, following the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the error informing flag is set, that is, whether or not the error informing is in progress (S504a), and the error informing flag is If it is not set (S504a; N), the process proceeds to S505, while if the error notification in progress flag is set (S504a; Y), the process proceeds to S504b and the error type priority specified in S504 is prioritized. It is further determined whether the degree is higher than the priority of the error type being notified, and when the degree is not higher than the priority of the error type being notified (S 504 b; N), the error notification process is ended. Therefore, while continuing the error notification that has already been executed, if it is higher than the priority of the error type being notified (S 504 b; N), after ending the error notification that is in progress (S 04c), it proceeds to S505, an error notification of the identified error type at S504, it may be started instead of the error notification in progress.

  As mentioned above, although an example of the embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any modification or addition may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. .

  For example, in the embodiment and the modification, the game stop state, which is a predetermined state, is disabled by restricting the firing of the game balls, and the main substrate 11 has a timer for controlling game control as in the game available time. By executing the interrupt processing, it is possible to detect a switch, pay out a prize ball, calculate and display winning information, send a presentation control command, etc., for example, a magnet sensor, a radio wave sensor, etc. Even if the game is stopped due to a false detection due to a false operation or noise, etc., the payout of the winning balls will be executed even if the game is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game stop state is set so that the game control timer interrupt process is substantially not performed, and the switch detection and the prize can be prevented. Of the sphere Ya brewed, calculation and display of the winning information, may state impossible to transmit such a performance control command.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modification, the game stop state is illustrated as the predetermined state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these predetermined states are different from the game stop state, for example, security signal When a security signal is being output or when an error (abnormality) is being reported by setting the status in which the status is being output or the status in which an error (abnormality) is being reported, output of a new security signal In addition, notification of a new error (abnormality) or determination of a new error (abnormality) may be limited, and these predetermined states are not caused by an error (abnormality), for example, a state outside business hours. It may be a condition that satisfies the time condition, such as a predetermined period before the store closing time, or a condition that satisfies the predetermined condition regarding the game (for example, the base is a design value. State or the lower limit value exceeds the upper limit of the reference range may be in a state) below.

  The predetermined state is, for example, displaceable at an operating position away from the home position, and at least a part of the operating range overlaps with a plurality of items (movable bodies) that may collide when operating simultaneously. In the case of including an origin sensor (detection means) capable of detecting that each accessory (movable body) is located at the origin position, in the initialization process for sequentially initializing each accessory (movable body) In the origin return operation of positioning the character (movable body) of 1 at the origin position, the origin sensor can not detect the character (movable body), and the character (movable body) can not be positioned at the origin position. Even if it is notified that the character (movable body) is abnormal due to the presence, even if it restricts the motion of a plurality of characters (movable body) at least a part of which the operation range overlaps. Good. In this case, the movement of the plurality of accessories (movable bodies) is restricted, and the return operation for positioning other accessories (movable bodies) other than one of the ones (movable bodies) at the origin position Since it does not perform the error judgment and the accompanying error notification, it is possible to prevent the inability to confirm which motion of a plurality of prizes (movable bodies) is restricted due to an error of a prize (movable bodies) It is possible to prevent an increase in processing load due to useless abnormality determination. That is, for each item (movable body), it is determined that the origin point sensor does not detect it as an origin return error (abnormality) in the origin point return operation, and the return-to-origin error (abnormality) for one item (movable body) When it is determined, determination and notification of the return-to-origin error (abnormality) may not be performed for the other item (movable body). When a security signal is output in response to an operation abnormality of one item (movable object), the security signal may not be output for another item (movable object).

  Further, in the embodiment and the modification described above, the embodiment has been exemplified in which the aspect ratio and the ratio are calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the abnormality in the aspect ratio and the ratio is not determined. It is not limited, and it is determined that a state in which the duty ratio exceeds a predetermined duty ratio specified value (for example, 70%) or a situation in which the duty ratio exceeds a duty ratio prescribed value (for example, 60%) is abnormal. An abnormality may be notified. Further, it may be determined or notified as a different type of error depending on the degree to which the combination ratio deviates from the combination ratio prescribed value or the degree to which the coupling ratio deviates from the coupled ratio prescribed value. In this case, the notification priority may be set according to the degree to which the combination ratio deviates from the combination ratio prescribed value or the degree to which the coupling ratio deviates from the ratio prescribed value.

  In addition, in the case of determining an abnormality with respect to the ratio or combination, if notification priority as shown in FIG. 19 is set in advance for these abnormalities, the combination or ratio based on the main side error processing shown in FIG. It is possible to signal an anomaly about the ratio.

  Further, in the case where a plurality of types of errors are set with respect to the winning ratio and coupling ratio, processing may be performed to stop the game or output a security signal for errors with high priority.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modification, the priority of each error (abnormality) is set in advance as shown in FIG. 19 and illustrates a mode in which the game arcade can not be appropriately changed, The present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine may be provided with priority changing means capable of appropriately changing the priority of each error (abnormality) and the like.

  In the embodiment and the modification, the game machine is provided with the second special variable winning ball device 7B opened by being a small hit, and the second special variable winning ball device 7B is a specific area. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 which becomes a big hit advantageous to the player by the game ball passing (entering) by 3 count switch 24B was illustrated, it is not limited to this, these 2nd special variable winning a prize ball device 7B , And only the first special variable winning prize ball device 7A may be provided.

  Further, although the embodiment and the modification have the display monitor 29 capable of displaying the winning information such as the winning ratio and the ratio, the embodiment is exemplified to execute the winning information processing and the winning information display control processing. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 29 may not be provided, and the winning information processing and the winning information display control processing may not be performed.

  Further, although the embodiment in which the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 11 is exemplified in the embodiment and the modification, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 29 is a substrate other than the main substrate 11 For example, it may be provided on a payout substrate, a power supply substrate, a relay substrate 15, an effect control substrate 12, or the like.

  Further, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, gaming balls of a predetermined number of balls can be circulated inside the gaming machine And the number of balls used for the game is reduced and stored, while the number of balls that have been enclosed and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, or the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning is added. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the gaming values.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball passes the third count switch 24B to extract the big hit type determination random number value MR2 and the extracted big hit type determination random Although the form which determines the big hit classification in the big hit game after the small hit game end was illustrated using numerical MR2 and V prize large hit classification decision table, but it is not something which is limited to this, plural types in small hit ( A small hit type) is also provided, and the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of each small hit type or from the end of the small hit game to the end of the third count switch 24B, uniquely small hit You may make it determine the jackpot classification in the jackpot game after the end of the game.

  Specifically, for example, while providing "small hit A", "small hit B", "small hit C" as a small hit type, a predetermined period from the small hit during "small hit A" and the small hit game If the game ball passes the third count switch 24B until it passes, the big hit type of the big hit game after the small hit game is determined to be "big hit A", and the small hit game of "small hit B" If the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the predetermined period after the end of the small hit game, the big hit type of the big hit game after the small hit game is determined to be "big hit B", "small If the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game during the small hit game or the small hit game from the end of the small hit game, the big hit type of the big hit game after the small hit game ends "big hit It may be determined to be "C".

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.),
Abnormality determination unit capable of determining the occurrence of abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities (for example, a portion that executes abnormality determination processing to determine the occurrence of each error (abnormality) shown in FIG. )When,
When the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, the notification is ended when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, and the notification about the determined abnormality is performed. Abnormality notification means (for example, when an error having a higher priority than an error being notified is determined in S407 of the main side error processing, if a game stop flag is not set, an error with a high priority error By transmitting a designated command to the effect control board 12, the error informing process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 executes the error informing of an error with a high priority, which has already been executed. A part to execute instead of
The state control means (for example, the CPU 103 prohibits the firing of the gaming ball in S411 and controls the game to stop) in accordance with the judgment of abnormality by the abnormality judgment means, based on the judgment of abnormality. Part),
A movable body provided movably between an origin position and a position away from the origin position (for example, a first retractable position at which the first movable portion 90302 tilts in a lateral direction (see FIG. 47). (A) (see FIG. 47) and a first effect position (see FIG. 47 (B)) in which the first movable portion 90302 is vertically erected at a position away from the first retraction (see FIG. 47B) 1 At a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905 and a second retraction position (origin position, initial position, see FIG. 48A) for retracting to one side of the movable role 90300 or the effect display device 905 A second movable part 90400 or the like provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between a second effect position (see FIG. 48B) which is disposed and separated from the second retracted position;
Drive means for operating the movable body (for example, a first movable role drive motor 90303, a second movable role drive motors 90411, 90421);
Control means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means;
Equipped with
When a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is a predetermined state (for example, a game stop state in which a game stop flag is set), the abnormality notification means Continue the notification of the abnormality that triggered the control of the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality (for example, in S407 of the main side error processing, an error having a higher priority than the error in the notification) If it is determined that the game stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 does not transmit the error designation command of the high priority error to the effect control board 12. (A part of continuing notification of an error that is already in progress) without executing error notification of a high priority error),
The control means
The first operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, the non-detection operation control of the step S90105 to the step S90114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control or the step S90120 of the effect control CPU 90120). ~ The second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the part that executes the operation control at the time of detection in step S90128) The third operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for performing effects by the movable body (eg, a portion that executes the operation control for actual operation check in steps S90201 to S90213 of the second initialization process) Movable body effect in the period and the big hit game state where the fluctuation display of the design is executed as operation control Such control executed) and it is possible to perform,
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within the range of the first speed and the second speed higher than the first speed (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control is for confirming the actual operation) When performing operation control, control is performed so that the movable part operates at a speed within the range of the first speed (minimum speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Do.)
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or less than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 is not detected as the first operation control) When performing operation control or detection operation control, the movable combination is at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check as the second operation control (for example, the same speed as the minimum speed in operation control for actual operation check) To control to operate
Gaming machines characterized by the above.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent that the event which is triggered to be controlled to the predetermined state becomes difficult to confirm. Further, in the first operation control, the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, so it can be safely positioned at the home position.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when an abnormality occurs in the movable body, such as when the movable body is not positioned at the origin position, the movable body does not operate normally, or the like, the abnormality is determined to be determined and the abnormality of the movable body is notified. May be Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation means for operating the movable body or the control means for controlling the operation of the movable body, the abnormality may be determined and the abnormality may be notified.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the movable body is in operation when notification of abnormality is performed, the movable body in operation may immediately return to the origin position and stop the operation, as it is The operation may be continued, and the series of operations may be finished before returning to the home position.

Furthermore, in the first operation control, since the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, as an example of a gaming machine that can be safely positioned at the origin position,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A movable body provided movably between an origin position and a position away from the origin position (for example, a first retractable position at which the first movable portion 90302 tilts in a lateral direction (see FIG. 47). (A) (see FIG. 47) and a first effect position (see FIG. 47 (B)) in which the first movable portion 90302 is vertically erected at a position away from the first retraction (see FIG. 47B) 1 At a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905 and a second retraction position (origin position, initial position, see FIG. 48A) for retracting to one side of the movable role 90300 or the effect display device 905 A second movable part 90400 or the like provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between a second effect position (see FIG. 48B) which is disposed and separated from the second retracted position;
Drive means for operating the movable body (for example, a first movable role drive motor 90303, a second movable role drive motors 90411, 90421);
Control means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means;
Equipped with
The control means
The first operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, the non-detection operation control of the step S90105 to the step S90114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control or the step S90120 of the effect control CPU 90120). ~ The second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the part that executes the operation control at the time of detection in step S90128) The third operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) for performing effects by the movable body (eg, a portion that executes the operation control for actual operation check in steps S90201 to S90213 of the second initialization process) Movable body effect in the period and the big hit game state where the fluctuation display of the design is executed as operation control Such control executed) and it is possible to perform,
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within the range of the first speed and the second speed higher than the first speed (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control is for confirming the actual operation) When performing operation control, control is performed so that the movable part operates at a speed within the range of the first speed (minimum speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Do.)
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or less than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 is not detected as the first operation control) When performing operation control or detection operation control, the movable combination is at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check as the second operation control (for example, the same speed as the minimum speed in operation control for actual operation check) To control to operate
Gaming machines characterized by the above.
Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
First, the entire configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine as another embodiment, will be described. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 33 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the back side as the rear (back) side. The front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is an opposing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”. Also, "execution" and "execution" are synonymous.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901, showing the layout of the main members. Pachinko gaming machines 901 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "gaming machines") are roughly classified into a gaming board 902 (gauge board) that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 (for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902). Frame) and In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In the game area, a game ball is fired from the ball striking device and struck.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 33, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided. The first special symbol display unit 904A and the second special symbol display unit 904B are each composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of distinguishable identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols configured with numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, for example. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display 904B is the "second special view" It is also called.

  The first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type It may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". In addition, each segment indicating “00” to “99” may be configured to be variably displayed by a display randomly arranged to make “00” to “99” invisible.

  Near the center of the game area of the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided. The effect display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B, for example In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, is variably displayed. The variable display of this effect pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. Then, in response to any one of the first special figure fluctuation at the first special symbol display 904A and the second special figure fluctuation at the second special symbol display 904B being started, The variation (for example, the scroll display in the vertical direction) of the effect design is started in each of the effect design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R “,” “middle” and “right”. After that, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of the effect display device 905, the confirmed effect symbols (final stop symbols) are stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 905, a special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 904A or a second special drawing in the second special symbol display 904B is used. In synchronization with the special figure game played, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the confirmed effect symbols are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). The variable display may be temporarily stopped during the variable display of the effect symbol.

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or “han” or “han”) are displayed on the effect symbols displayed in a variable manner in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, eight character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to eight types, but it may be any number as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of "big hit" and a combination of "off" (for example, seven types or 9 types etc).

  After the variation display of the production design is started, until the finalized production design is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, or “left”, “middle”, and “right” At least one of the display areas 905L, 905C, 905R (for example, the "left" rendering symbol display area 5L, etc.), for example, from top to bottom sequentially from top to bottom with a symbol number When the scroll display is performed and the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the effect symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed.

  A first hold storage display area 905D and a second hold storage display area 905U are set at two places on the left and right under the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U, a hold storage display is performed to display the number of the hold storages for the variable display corresponding to the special view game (the number of special view hold storages) in an identifiable manner.

  Here, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B for suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or a variable display of a production symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done. Hold memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is a round white display, by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening The on-hold storage display generated based on the start winning combination is displayed as a circular blue display.

  In the following description, the display in the first hold storage display area 905D and the second hold storage display area 905U may be collectively referred to as "hold display".

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, together with the storage storage display area, the first storage for specifying the number of special storages in the upper and lower portions of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as “total pending storage number”.

  Under the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning hole (enter) It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in a normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening changes into an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or can not pass (enter).

  The gaming ball having passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first start opening switch 9022A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " If it is less than 4 "), the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " If it is less than 4 "), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 34, and a predetermined area which changes between the open state and the closed state To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the large winning opening (entry) I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is on, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball having passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 907 in the open state, the gaming ball moves to another winning hole (for example, the first start winning hole and the second starting winning hole). More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special prize winning opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is in the open state, the gaming ball can enter into the special winning prize mouth, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 is in a closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to get a winning prize by letting the gaming ball pass (enter) to the special winning prize mouth. It is a disadvantageous second state.

  An ordinary symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 33, the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and multiple types of identification information different from the special symbols The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display). Such a variation display of an ordinary symbol is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game").

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  Speakers 908 L and 908 R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and further, an effect LED 909 is provided around the gaming area.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like in order to shoot the gaming ball toward the playing area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  An upper plate that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls paid out by lending to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A (ball hitting supply tray) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 34 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the game board 902 or the like.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 mainly has a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function capable of inputting an output signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a control board on the sub side A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to the outside are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special view or the second special view Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the effect display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the LED 909 for presentation are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs the display operation of the effect display device 905, the operation of the first movable character 90300, the second movable character 90400 and the third movable character 90500, and the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for effecting to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as all or part of all or part of the on / off operation of the effect LED 909 or the like. Note that the relay substrate 9015 may not be provided.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The sound control board 9013 is a speaker based on a command from the effect control board 9012 or control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for outputting audio from the 908L and 908R is mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The lamp control board 9014 drives on / off of the effect LED 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. A lamp driver circuit and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the main substrate 9011 is connected with a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball, such as those called "sensors". If it is In addition, on the main substrate 9011, a first special symbol display 904A, a second special symbol display 904B, an ordinary symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, a common view hold indicator 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The command form shown in FIG. 35 is an example, and another command form may be used. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it may be a value according to the content of the instruction by the effect control command.

  The command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the first special symbol display 904A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command that designates the fluctuation start on the second special symbol display 904B. The command 81XXH is a fluctuation pattern designation command for specifying a fluctuation pattern (variation time), and different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result. The command 8C00H is a command indicating the result of the predetermination to the effect of "disappearing". The command 8C01H is a command to notify that the "big hit" and the big hit type will be "probably hit big hit A". The command 8C02H is a command to notify that the "big hit" and the big hit type will be "probably big hit B". The command 8C03H is a command to notify that the "big hit" and the big hit type will be "non-probable variation big hit".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the change stop (determination) of the effect pattern. The command 95XXH is a game state designating command for designating a game state at that time.

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state and the large winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a big winning opening after opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is closed from the opening state and that the big winning opening is in the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command for specifying the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, in the large winning a prize opening opening notification command and the large winning a prize opening opening notification command, for example, the number of times of execution of the round of the normally open big hit state and the short open open big hit state (for example “1” ̃ “16” or “1” EXT data corresponding to “)” is set.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition is satisfied by the winning on the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The command B200H is a second starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that the second starting condition is satisfied by the winning of the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for reporting the first special view pending storage number. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, various processes for controlling the progress of the game are executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101.

  On the main substrate 9011, a random number value MR'1 for special view display result determination, a random number value MR'2 for big hit type determination, a random number value MR'3 for variation pattern determination, and a random value MR for common pattern display result determination Numerical data of various random numbers such as '4' is controlled to be able to be counted. The random number circuit 90104 is only required to be able to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR′1 to MR′4. The CPU 90103 does not count random number values not counted by the random number circuit 90104. It may be made to count by updating various numerical data by software.

  FIG. 36 shows a fluctuation pattern. In this example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 36 are prepared in advance. Specifically, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display result is also corresponding to each of the case where the variation display mode of the effect pattern is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where "big hit" occurs.

  The reach effect of normal reach is executed for the big hit fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display result is "big hit", and the reach fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation display mode of the production design is "reach" There are a normal reach change pattern and a super reach change pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α 'and super reach β' is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, it is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α ′, normal reach β ′,. May be provided. In addition to the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ ′ may be provided in addition to the super reach α ′ and the super reach β ′.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the special map fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is set shorter than super reach α 'and super reach β' which are super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, regarding the special map fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α 'and the super reach β' is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β 'is executed The special pattern fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α ′ is executed.

  As described above, since the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β ', super reach α' and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high, so the normal reach change pattern and the super reach change pattern The big hit expectation is higher as the fluctuation time is longer.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 of the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 34 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011, and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data etc. which constitute a fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this example, the display result determination table common to the first and second special views is used as the display result determination table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it use a separate display result determination table with a figure.

  Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game of the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B, the display result judgment table is in the big hit gaming state with the variable display result as the "big hit". It is a table referred to determine whether to control based on the random value MR′1.

  In the display result determination table described above, a numerical value (decision (decision) to be compared with the random value MR '1 depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) or the probability variation state (high probability state) Value) is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "losing".

  In the display result determination table, determination data is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". More specifically, when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are allocated to the special hit display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) It is done. In this way, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" when in the normal state or the short time state (low probable state) in the positive variation state where high probability control is performed Compared to (for example, about 1/300), the probability that it is determined that the special image display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a "big hit" is higher (for example, about 1/30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state is the high probability state, the probability that it is determined to control the big hit gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the short time state, The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

  In the ROM 90101, when it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, the big hit type determination table or random number value to be referred to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR'2. A variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern as any of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 36 described above based on MR ′ 3 is also stored.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 38 (A), depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the judgment value for the big hit type of "probably big hit A" and "prone big hit B" Allocation is different. That is, when the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing, there is no assignment to the big hit type of "small fluctuation big hit B" with a small number of rounds, and "fixed fluctuation big hit B" does not occur in the fluctuation display of the second special drawing. In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B by the high opening control accompanying time saving control, the probability ball obtained is small. Can prevent frequent occurrence of the game and the decrease in the game entertainment. Note that the setting example shown in FIG. 38A is merely an example, and a jackpot type other than that shown in FIG. 38A may be provided, and the determination ratio of each jackpot, the presence or absence of the determination, etc. It may be set appropriately.

  In addition, as the fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 90101, it is determined in advance that the "big hit" change pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the "big hit" is used. A release fluctuation pattern determination table to be used at the time is prepared in advance. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the reach is easier to be determined when the big hit than the time of the outing, and the possibility of the big hit (reliability and expectation) becomes higher when the reach occurs and the same. Even if it is the fluctuation pattern of the reach, the probability (reliability and the degree of expectation) of the super reach is higher than the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β 'is the same even if it is the same super reach, Determination values corresponding to each variation pattern are set in the variation pattern determination table for big hit and the variation pattern determination table for deviation so that the probability (reliability and expectation) for becoming a probability variation big hit becomes high.

  Note that the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a plurality of tables corresponding to the total number of pending storages and the time saving state, and the total number of pending storages corresponds to 2 to 4 according to the number of pending storages and the time saving state. Short non-reach loss variation pattern (PA'1-2), Short non-reach loss variation pattern (PA'1-3) corresponding to a total of 5 to 8 pending storages, short non-reach variation By determining the fluctuation pattern (PA '1-4) of the loss according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state (short time state), the shorter the variation pattern is more easily executed as the total number of pending storages increases, that is, By increasing the number of changes per unit time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of useless start winnings, and during time saving control (during time saving state), it is possible to shorten compared with when time saving control is not executed. Non reach By determining many variation patterns (PA'1-4) and increasing the number of variations per unit time, the period until the next big hit can be shortened, and the player's sense of continuity can be improved. There is.

  The RAM 90102 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 34 may be a backup RAM backed up in part or in whole by backup power from a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). When the power is turned on again, it takes over data indicating the progress of the game such as data corresponding to the gaming state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special drawing process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls. do it.

  Such a RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game or the like. In the game control data holding area, although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the start winning (first start winning) occurs, it has not been started yet. A first special view reserve storage unit storing random number value MR'1, random number value MR'2 and numerical data indicating random number value MR'3 and the like as reserve data for a special view game using a special view, and ordinary variable winning The game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the ball device 906B and the start winning (second start winning) occurs but the special drawing game is suspended using the second special view that has not been started yet The second special view reserve storage unit for storing, as data, random number value MR ′ 1, random number value MR ′ 2, numerical data indicating random number value MR ′ 3, and the like; Update the status according to the progress of the game Used to control the progress of the game, the game control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags, the game control timer setting unit provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game, and Game control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value to be played, and a game provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game And a control buffer setting unit.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, etc., and the effect control CPU 90120 independently update numerical data indicating random numbers A random number circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute various types of processing for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for effect. For example, as processing for controlling these rendering operations, the receiving control for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the rendering control substrate 9012 via the I / O 90125, the rendering control CPU 90120 via the I / O 90125 Then, transmission processing for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 is also performed.

  In addition, also on the side of the effect control board 9012, similarly to the main board 9011, for example, various random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining execution or non-execution of various effects, type of effect, etc. It is done. In addition to the program for effect control, the ROM 90121 is used to control various effects including the operation of the first movable object 90300, the second movable object 90400, and the third movable object 90500. Table data, for example, table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables for execution and non-execution of various effects, determination of types of effects, etc., pattern data etc. constituting effect control patterns corresponding to each variation pattern It is memorized.

  Among the effect control patterns, the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern is the fluctuation display of the effect symbol during the period from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to each fluctuation pattern It consists of data etc. which show the control contents of various rendering operations such as movement and reach effects to operate each movable combination (the first movable combination 90300, the second movable combination 90400, the third movable combination 90500) There is.

  Further, the RAM 90122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area is provided with an effect control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to an effect operation state or an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, and various effect operations The effect control timer setting unit and effect control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of timers and counters used to control the progress of the image, and the data used to control the progress of various effect operations are temporarily used. And an effect control buffer setting unit provided with various buffers to be stored.

  In addition, the storage area (buffer number "1-1"-"1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserve storage number of the 1st special view reserve storage in the predetermined field of the effect control buffer setting unit Storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages of the second special view pending storage) Area is provided, and data constituting a pending storage buffer capable of specifying the status of pending storage at that time is stored, and based on the data of the pending storage buffer, the first pending storage display area 905D and the second pending storage display area The pending display of the pending storage display area 905U is displayed.

  A first movable character object 90300, a second movable character object 90400, and a third movable character object 90500 as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 9012. The first movable character object 90300, the second movable character object An operation of the third movable role object 90500 is controlled by an effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, it is detected whether or not the first movable combination drive motor 90303 for driving the first movable combination 90300 and the first movable combination 90300 are located at the origin position. First movable combination origin detection sensor 90316 (photo sensor) for driving, second movable combination drive motors 90411 and 90421 for driving the second movable combination 90400, and a second movable combination 90400 at the origin position The second movable combination origin detection sensor 90440A, 90440B (photosensor) for detecting whether or not the third movable combination drive motor 90520 for driving the third movable combination 90500 is connected. Control the operation of the first movable role drive motor 90303, the second movable role drive motors 90411 and 90421, and the third movable The effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120) can individually control the operation of the first movable object 90300, the second movable object 90400, and the third movable object 90500. Effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120) can detect whether the first movable part 90300, the second movable part 90400, and the third movable part 90500 are positioned at the origin position (initial position). It has become.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute various effects related to the game, such as variable display control of the effect pattern and a notice effect, based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. ing. For example, as a notice effect performed by the CPU 90120 for effect control during the variable display of the effect pattern, a big hit notice effect indicating the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice indicating whether or not to reach, a notice of a stop pattern It includes a plurality of notices executed at the time of variable display start or reach establishment, such as a stop symbol notice, and a latent notice for giving a notice of whether the gaming state is a probability fluctuation state (latency) or not. Then, the CPU 90120 for effect control operates each movable role (the first movable role 90300, the second movable role 90400, and the third movable role 90500) from the origin position to the effect position in various effects including the advance effects. It is possible to execute a movable body effect.

  Here, the structure of each of the first movable part 90300, the second movable part 90400, and the third movable part 90500 will be briefly described based on FIGS. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of operation control for actual operation check in the first movable part 90300. As shown in FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of operation control for actual operation check in the second movable part 90400. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of operation control for actual operation check in the third movable part 90500.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable role product 90300 is provided below the effect display device 905 between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902, Base portion 90301 fixed to the first movable portion 90302 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion 90301, and a first retracted position where the first movable portion 90302 is horizontally inclined (origin position, initial position 47 (A)) and the first effect position (see FIG. 47 (B)) in which the first movable portion 90302 stands vertically at a position away from the first retraction (refer to FIG. 47 (A)). And a first movable part drive motor 90303. A stepping motor is applied as the first movable product drive motor 90303.

  In the base portion 90301, a bearing hole 90310 is formed to penetrate, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 90310 is formed around the bearing hole 90310. The first movable part drive motor 90303 is fixed to the lower right position of the bearing hole 90310 in the rear surface of the base portion 90301 on the rear surface, and a drive shaft (not shown) which penetrates the base portion 90301 and protrudes forward. A rotary disk 90312 is fixed to the tip.

  A shaft member 90313, which is directed in the front-rear direction, protrudes at a predetermined position of the peripheral edge of the rotary disk 90312. The lower end of the link member 90314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 90313. Further, a detection target portion 90315 is provided on the opposite side of the shaft member 90313 in the peripheral edge of the rotary disc 90312. The first movable part origin detection sensor is provided with the detected part 90315 below the rotary disc 90312. By being detected by 90316, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the first movable portion 90302 is located at the tilt position (origin position). That is, the first movable role object 90300 is an action target object to be a target of non-detection operation control or detection operation control described later.

  When the first movable portion 90302 is in the first retraction position, it retracts below the display screen of the effect display device 905 (see FIG. 33), and the effect display device 905 is at the first effect position away from the first retraction position. At least a part of the display screen is superimposed on the front side of the display screen.

  The first movable portion 90302 is provided on a pivoting member 90320 provided rotatably with respect to the base portion 90301. For example, the front surface portion can emit light by a built-in light emitter (not shown). The pivoting member 90320 is a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and in the front right side, a pivoting shaft 90325 inserted from the rear side into the bearing hole 90310 and a guide projecting on the left side of the pivoting shaft 90325 The groove 90311 has a first guide shaft 90326 inserted from the rear side, and a second guide shaft 90327 protruding from the upper right of the pivot shaft 90325 and inserted into the guide groove 90311 from the rear side.

  The upper end of the link member 90314 is rotatably supported at the tip end of a second guide shaft 90327 which is inserted through the guide groove 90311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 90301. That is, the rotary disc 90312 and the rotating member 90320 are connected via the link member 90314. In addition, a coil spring 90328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 90325 to always bias the rotation member 90320 toward the first effect position.

  At the origin position (initial position) of the first movable part 90300 configured in this manner, the first movable portion 90302 is positioned at the tilt position as shown in FIG. 47 (A). The first movable part product drive motor 90303 rotates the rotary disc 90312 clockwise in a front view, and the second guide shaft 90327 is pulled downward by the link member 90314, centering on the rotational shaft 90325. The first movable portion 90302 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise in a front view, and rotates to an upright position, which is a first effect position shown in FIG. 47 (B). Since the biasing force of the coil spring 90328 acts when rotating from the first retracted position to the first effect position, the load applied to the first movable product drive motor 90303 is reduced. Further, the first movable combination product drive motor 90303 is reversely driven to rotate from the first retracted position to the first effect position.

  In addition, when the first movable part 90300 moves to the first retracted position, the first guide shaft 90326 abuts one end of the guide groove 90311, whereby the first movable part 90300 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. Is restricted, and the second guide shaft 90327 abuts on the other end of the guide groove 90311 when the first movable part 90300 moves to the first effect position, whereby the front view clockwise of the first movable part 90300 The rotation is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the second movable part 90400 is extended in the left-right direction, and a second movable part 90401 slightly shorter than the left-right dimension of the effect display device 905, and extended in the up-down direction, the effect display And a second movable portion 90402 which has substantially the same size as the upper and lower dimensions of the device 905. The second movable parts 90401 and 90402 are provided between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905. Further, the second movable portion 90402 is provided at a position rearward of the second movable portion 90401. The second movable portion 90401 is a panel on which, for example, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed when the second movable portion 90401 is at a second retraction position described later, and the second movable portion at the upper position of the effect display device 905 A part is concealed by a logo panel 90450 provided at a position forward of 90401.

  A rack gear 90410 facing vertically is fixed to the left end of the second movable portion 90401, and a pinion gear 90412 fixed to the drive shaft of the second movable part drive motor 90411 consisting of a stepping motor is fixed to the rack gear 90410. Are engaged. The second movable part product drive motor 90411 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the left side of the effect display device 905. Further, the second movable portion 90401 is guided so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a guide member (not shown).

  Therefore, the second movable portion 90401 is positioned at the second retracted position above the effect display device 905 (the origin position, the initial position, and the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. And a second effect position (refer to a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 48B) which is disposed at a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905 and is separated from the second retracted position. Can be moved back and forth.

  Also, a detected part 90430A protrudes from the right end of the second movable part 90401, and the detected part 90430A is detected by a second movable part origin detection sensor 90440A provided on the base side. Thus, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the second movable portion 90401 is located at the second retracted position (origin position).

  A rack gear 90420 facing in the left-right direction is fixed to the upper end portion of the second movable portion 90402, and a pinion gear 90422 fixed to the drive shaft of the second movable part drive motor 90421 consisting of a stepping motor is fixed to the rack gear 90420. Are engaged. The second movable part product drive motor 90421 is fixed to a base (not shown) at a substantially central position in the left-right direction above the effect display device 905. In addition, the second movable portion 90402 is movably guided in the vertical direction by a guide member (not shown).

  Therefore, the second movable portion 90402 is driven by the second movable part product drive motor 90421 to the second retracted position on the left side of the effect display device 905 (refer to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. The second effect position (refer to the position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 48 (B)) disposed in the substantially central position in the left and right direction in front of and is reciprocable in the left and right direction.

  Further, a to-be-detected portion 90430B is provided in a projecting manner at the lower end portion of the second movable portion 90402, and the to-be-detected portion 90430B is detected by a second movable combination object origin detection sensor 90440B provided on the base portion side. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify that the second movable portion 90402 is located at the second retracted position (origin position). That is, the second movable role object 90400 is an action target object which is a target of non-detection operation control or detection operation control described later.

  In the second movable part 90400 configured in this way, at the second retracted position (origin position, initial position), the second movable portion 90401 is above the effect display device 905, as shown in FIG. The 2 movable part 90402 is located on the left side of the effect display device 905. Then, the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 move to the second effect position shown in FIG. 48 (B) by driving the second movable product drive motors 90411 and 90421, and the second movable product drive motor 90411, By moving the 90421 in the reverse direction, it moves from the second effect position to the second retracted position.

  Further, although the second movable part 90400 is not particularly illustrated, when the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 are moved to the second retracted position, the controlled parts of the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 abut against the restriction part on the base part side. The movement of the movable part 90400 in the direction of the second retracted position is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the third movable role product 90500 is partially rendered at the lower right position of the effect display device 905 between the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 provided on the back side of the game board 902. It is provided to be superimposed on the display device 905. The third movable part 90500 has a base portion 90501 having a circular front view fixed at a predetermined position, a third movable portion 90502 rotatably provided to the base portion 90501, and a third movable portion 90502. And a third movable part drive motor 90520 for rotating (rotating) about a rotation shaft 90503 facing in the front-rear direction. A stepping motor is applied as the third movable product drive motor 90520.

  The third movable part drive motor 90520 is provided above the rotary shaft 90503 on the back of the base portion 90501, and the first gear 90505 is fixed to the tip of the drive shaft 90520A of the third movable part drive motor 90520 There is. The second gear 90506 is engaged with the first gear 90505, and the third gear 90507 fixed to the rear end of the rotary shaft 90503 is engaged with the second gear 90506, and the third movable part drive motor 90520 is used. By rotating the first gear 90505, the rotational force of the first gear 90505 is transmitted to the third movable portion 90502 via the second gear 90506 and the third gear 90507, whereby the third movable portion 90502 is rotated. Forward or reverse rotation about the rotation shaft 90503.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the third movable portion 90502 has a circular shape in a front view, has a predetermined pattern on the front surface, and is provided so that the front surface can emit light by a built-in light emitter (not shown). ing. As described above, the third movable portion 90502 has a circular shape in a front view, and has no upper and lower sides in particular in a predetermined pattern, and does not move from the predetermined position only by rotating about the rotation axis 90503. There is no position. Therefore, it is considered as an operation non-target object that does not have the origin detection sensor that detects the origin position.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be performed after the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is performed.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening through the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S9012). Thereafter, predetermined information output processing is executed (S9013).

  Next, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR'1 to MR'4 by software is executed (S9014). Thereafter, special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 40 is executed (S9015).

  Following the special symbol process processing, the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 9020 is controlled, and the variation display of the normal symbol and the tilting of the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 906B are performed. A normal symbol process process is performed to perform operation setting and the like (S9016). Thereafter, by executing the command control process, the control command is transmitted (outputted) from the main substrate 9011 to the sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (S9017).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, first, the start winning determination process is executed (S9021). Thereafter, one of the processes in S9022 to S9029 is selected and executed in accordance with the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152.

  In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 9022A or the second starting opening switch 9022B, and if there is a winning, the random value MR ' 1, MR'2 and MR'3 are extracted and stored in the top of the vacant entry in the first special view reservation storage section in the case of the first start prize, and in the case of the second start prize , And stored at the top of the free entry of the second special view reservation storage unit.

  The special symbol normal processing of S9022 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the special drawing game based on the presence or absence of the pending data. Further, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR ′ 1, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, a determined special symbol (either a big hit symbol or an off symbol) is set in accordance with the variable display result. Then, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The fluctuation pattern setting processing of S9023 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "1". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern is determined to any one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR'3 based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". Processing etc. are included. Then, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of S9024 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In special symbol variation processing, processing to perform setting for varying the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 904A or the second special symbol indicator 904B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. In addition, when the fluctuation elapsed time of the special symbol reaches the special drawing fluctuation time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S9025 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". Special symbol stop processing includes processing to perform setting for stopping (deriving) a finalized special symbol that will be a variation display result of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B. It is done. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on, and if the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S9026 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In the big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation display result becoming “big hit” etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and perform the setting to open the big winning opening include. Specifically, while setting the upper limit of the period when the big winning a prize opening state is set to “29 seconds”, the opening number of the big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit number of times to execute round, “non-probability variation big hit” or If it is a big hit A ", it is set to" 16 times ". On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit B”, the number of times of opening of the special winning opening, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is set to “five times”. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S9027 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is updated to "6". .

  The jackpot post-processing of S9028 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of S9029 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  In the big hit end process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit is read out, and whether the big hit type is "non-probable big hit", "probably big hit A", or "probably big hit B" Identify. Then, if it is determined that the identified jackpot type is not "non-probable variation big hit", setting (setting of a probability variation flag) for starting the probability variation control is performed.

  In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variation big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (preset corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable during the setting of the time reduction flag and time reduction control) A predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") is set in the time saving counter.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main processing shown in FIG. In the main processing, first, the first initialization processing (S9050) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control A second initialization process is performed to return the movable role products 90300, 90400, and 90500 to their original positions and to check their operation (S9051). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag by timer interrupt processing. If the timer interruption flag is set (on) in the main processing, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first performs command analysis processing (S9054). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 35) the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 stored in the reception command buffer is. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received presentation control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (S9055). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 905.

  Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating effect random numbers such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S9056), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S9052.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S9051). In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 first specifies a movable role to be operated first based on the setting data (S90101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable part, and the order of the first movable part 90300 → the second movable part 90400 → the third movable part 90500 is preset. Therefore, when S90101 is executed for the first time, the first movable part 90300 is specified as the target movable part.

  Next, it is determined whether the movable combination specified in S90101 is an origin detection target combination that needs to be subjected to origin detection (S90102).

  In this example, the first movable object 90300 having the first movable combination object origin detection sensor 90316 and the second movable combination object origin detection sensors 90440A and 90440B as the origin detection target objects that need to perform the origin detection. The second movable part 90400 having the above corresponds to the third movable part 90500 not having the origin detection sensor. Therefore, when the movable part specified in S90101 is the first movable part 90300 or the second movable part 90400, it is determined as "Y" in the determination, while the movable part specified in S90101 is the first In the case of the three movable role 90500, it will be determined as "N".

  If “N” is determined in S90102, the process proceeds to S90130. On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S90102, the process proceeds to S90103 to identify the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation target role (S90103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable combination is located at the home position (initial position) (S90104).

  If it is not located at the home position (initial position) (S90104; N), the process proceeds to S90105, and after setting the non-detection operation number counter to count the number of non-detection operation control executions, 0 (S90105), as a control speed for operating the operation target product, the operation target at the same operation speed as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 44 and 45) in the operation control for actual operation check (long initialization operation control) described later The minimum control speed for operating the accessory is set (S90106), and the driving motor of the operating object, for example, the first movable accessory driving motor 90303 if the operating object is the first movable accessory 90300 Is started in the direction of the home position (S90107), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S90108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at predetermined intervals. .

  Then, while the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, the non-detection operation period timer is shifted to the monitoring state to monitor whether the value corresponds to the upper limit time (S90109, S90110).

  By driving the driving object (for example, the first movable object driving motor 90303) of the operation object to the origin position direction, the operation object is positioned at the origin position (initial position), and the origin detection sensor detects If not, the drive of the movable part drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S90130. On the other hand, if the non-detection time operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the operation target role is not positioned at the home position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S90112 Then, the non-detection operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S90112), and it is determined whether the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S90113).

  If the value of the non-detection time operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S90113, the drive of the movable combination drive motor is stopped, and the origin return error of the operation object is stored (S90114), It progresses to S90130. That is, when the operation subject is not positioned at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later for the operation subject is not performed (the case The return-to-home error is stored in order to bring the operation target product to a dead end state, and the process advances to step S90130.

  In S90113, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations, a mode is shown in which the operation target role is dead-ended, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the value of the non-detection time operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S90113, the error process is started, and the second initialization process is interrupted by executing the error process. The control main processing may be interrupted without proceeding to step S9052, and the effect control board 9012 (such as the effect control CPU 90120) may be in a non-starting state (dead end state).

  Further, when the operation target role is in a dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (the effect control CPU 90120 etc.) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is an input signal indicating that the movable role is to be operated ( For example, it is preferable to execute processing such as disabling reception of a detection signal of a presentation button or the like, or preventing movement of the movable part even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the operation error determination number, the driving of the movable combination drive motor is stopped, the process returns to S90106, and the processing of S90106 to S90108 is performed again. The operation to move the operating object to the home position at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) is started (operation control at non-detection time) started, and the monitoring state of S90109 and S90110 described above Migrate to

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S90110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) for repeatedly moving the operation target object to the home position (initial position) is performed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the operation target product is detected at the home position (initial position) while doing this, the process proceeds to S90130 without proceeding to S90114.

  On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S90104 described above and the process proceeds to S90120, 0 is set in the detection operation number counter, and then the detection operation process data is set (S90121a), the detection operation process timer Timer counting is started (S90121 b). As the timer count of the process time timer for detection, as with the timer count of the non-detection time period timer described above, a signal output from CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is used. It may be performed by counting the number or the like. In addition, at the time of operation process data for detection, as a control speed for operating the operation target character, the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) described later (see FIG. 44, FIG. 45) The minimum control speed for operating the operating target at the same operating speed is described (set).

  Next, based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection process process data, the operation target role is operated (S90122), and it is determined whether the process data is completed (S90123), the process data Is not completed, the process returns to S90122, and the operation target role is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

  Thus, in the detection operation control, until the detection operation process data is completed, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initial At the lowest speed in the control operation (operation control), an operation is performed to once move away from the home position (initial position) and return from the position away from the home position (initial position) to the home position (initial position) (see FIG. 44). Note that the position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where the detected portions of each movable combination can not be detected by each origin sensor, and is a predetermined position closer to the origin position than each effect position ( It is set as an operation position at detection time).

  If it is determined in S90123 that the set detection process process data has been completed, the drive of the movable combination drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S90124, and is the origin detection sensor in the detection state? In other words, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the operation subject is located at the home position (initial position).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the operation subject is located at the origin position (initial position), the process advances to step S90130.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation subject is not positioned at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation number counter (S90126) It is determined whether the value of the detection-time operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S90127). If the value of the operation number counter at the time of detection has reached the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S90128 to store the origin return error of the operation object (S90128), and the process proceeds to S90130. That is, when the operation subject is not positioned at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later for the operation subject is not performed (the operation The return-to-home error is stored for dead end of the target character, and the process advances to step S90130.

  In this example, when the value of the operation number counter at the time of detection reaches the number of operation error determinations in S90127, an example is shown in which the operation target role is dead-ended, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, when the value of the operation time counter at detection reaches the number of operation error determinations in S90113, error processing is started, and the second initialization processing is interrupted by executing the error processing. Alternatively, the effect control main processing may be interrupted without proceeding to step S9052, and the effect control substrate 9012 may not be activated (dead end state).

  Further, when the operation target role is in a dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (the effect control CPU 90120 etc.) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is an input signal for operating the movable effect (for example, effect It is preferable to execute processing such as invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable part from operating even when the input signal is input.

  If it is determined that "N" is determined in S90102, if it is determined "Y" in S90109, or if it is determined "Y" in S90124, then in S90130, the movable part is still an operation target It is determined whether or not there are no remaining movable parts, and if there are no remaining movable parts (specifically, if the operation target part is the third movable part 90500), The flow shifts to processing for performing operation control for actual operation confirmation shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the remaining movable part is present, the process advances to S90131 to specify the movable part to be operated next, and then returns to S90102 to execute the above-described processes from S90102 for the specified movement target part. Execute the process as well.

  When S90131 is executed when the operation target role is the first movable role object 90300, the second movable role object 90400 is specified as the operation target role based on the setting data, and the operation target role object In the case where S90131 is executed when the second movable part 90400 is a second movable part, the third movable part 90500 is specified as the operation target part based on the setting data.

  Next, the process shown in FIG. 43 will be described. First, in S90200 shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms the operation based on the setting data as in the above-described S90101. ) Is identified (S90200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a storage of the origin return error of the target role (S90201).

  If there is storage of the return-to-origin error of the check target role, the process advances to step S90220 without executing the processing of steps S90202a to S90213. By doing this, the operation control for actual operation confirmation is not performed with respect to the movable combination determined as the origin return error in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

  On the other hand, if there is no storage of the return-to-origin error of the check target role, the process proceeds to S90202a, and process data for actual operation check corresponding to the check target role is set. That is, if the confirmation target character is the first movable character object 90300, the process data for actual operation confirmation of the first movable character object 90300 is set, and if the confirmation target character is the second movable character object 90400, the first (2) The process data for actual operation check of the movable part 90400 is set, and if the object to be confirmed is the third movable part 90500, the process data for actual operation check of the third movable part 90500 is set. In each of the actual operation check process data, a control speed and the like are described (set) such that the movable combination performs the same operation as the actual movement of the movable object in the effect.

  Then, the timer count of the process timer for operation check is started (S90202 b). As the timer count of the process check timer for actual operation, similarly to the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above, a signal output at regular intervals from CTC initialized in the first initialization process It may be performed by counting the number of

  Then, the control target role is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data (S90203), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not it has been completed (S90204), and if the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S90203, and the check target role is set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer at that time. Operate based on the control speed being controlled.

  Thus, until the process data for actual operation confirmation is completed, the object to be confirmed is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the process timer for actual operation confirmation in the process data for actual operation confirmation The control speed of the object to be confirmed is sequentially changed in time series by causing the same to accelerate or decelerate as the control speed set when actually operating the movable role in the movable object effect. Can.

  Then, if it is determined in S90204 that the set process data for actual operation confirmation is completed, the driving of the movable combination drive motor is stopped, and is the target combination an origin target combination? It is determined whether or not it is (S90204a). If the target role is not the origin detection target role, that is, if it is the third movable role 90500, the process proceeds to S90220, and if the target role is the third movable role 90500, the process proceeds to S90222. On the other hand, if the target part is the origin detection target part, that is, if it is the first movable part 90300 or the second movable part 90400, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the target role is located at the home position (initial position) (S90205).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the confirmation target role is located at the origin position (initial position), the process advances to step S90220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the object to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-mentioned operation control at non-detection time (see FIG. 42) is performed. The processing of S90206 to S90213 is performed in order to position the target part at the origin position (initial position).

  Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control (S90206), operation control for actual operation confirmation as control speed (long initialization operation control) Set the minimum control speed to operate the operating target character at the same operating speed as the minimum speed in (S90207), and for example, if the confirmation target character is the first movable commercial object 90300 For example, driving of the first movable combination product drive motor 90303 toward the home position (initial position) direction is started (S90208), and timer count of the non-detection time operation period timer is started (S90209).

  Then, in addition to whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, it shifts to the monitoring state where it is monitored whether the non-detection operation period timer has become a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S90210, S90211).

  The target role is detected at the home position (initial position) by driving the target role driving device (for example, the first movable role driving motor 90303) toward the home position (initial position), and the home position detection sensor detects If the state is reached, "Y" is determined in S90210, and the process proceeds to S90220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the confirmation target role is not positioned at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S90212 Then, 1 is added to the non-detection time operation counter (S90212), and it is determined whether the value of the non-detection time operation counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S90213).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter has reached the operation error determination number, the process advances to step S90220. In addition, when the value of the operation | movement frequency counter at the time of non-detection in S90213 has reached the operation | movement error determination frequency, although the form which carries out the dead end state of the said operation object is illustrated, it is not limited to this. If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S90213, store the origin return error of the operation target combination, and do not execute the actual operation thereafter for the operation combination target You may do it. Alternatively, the second initialization process is interrupted by starting the error process and executing the error process, the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to step S9052, and the effect control board 9012 is not activated. You may make it (dead end state).

  Further, when the operation target role is in a dead end state, the effect control board 9012 (the effect control CPU 90120 etc.) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is an input signal for operating the movable effect (for example, effect It is preferable to execute processing such as invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable part from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection time operation counter does not reach the operation error determination number, the process returns to S90207, and the processing of S90207, S90208, and S90209 is performed again to confirm the check target role object and the actual operation confirmation. The operation (operation at the time of origin return) to move to the home position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control for operation (long initialization operation control) is started to shift to the monitoring state of S90210 and S90211 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S90211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) is performed to move the target object repeatedly to the home position (initial position) until the operation error determination count is reached. If the target character is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the process, the process advances to step S90220.

  If “Y” is determined in S90201, “N” is determined in S90204 a, “Y” is determined in S90205, or “Y” is determined in S90210, the process is executed in S90220. It is determined whether or not there are remaining movable parts that are not subject to confirmation of the operation check among the movable parts, and there is no remaining movable part (specifically, the target combination of the operation confirmation) If the object is the third movable part 90500), the record of the error stored in S90114 or S90128 is cleared (S90222), and the processing is ended while the remaining movable part is present. Then, the process proceeds to S90221, and after the movable part to be operation confirmed next is specified, the process returns to S90201, and the above-mentioned processing from S90201 onward for the specified target part. To run as.

  Here, the operation mode and control contents of the movable part by execution of the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described using FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. FIG. 44 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation check operation control performed by the effect control CPU 90120. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing control speed in operation control for actual operation check, FIG. 45B is an explanatory view showing control speed in operation control at detection time, and FIG. 45C is a control speed in operation control at non detection time FIG.

  In FIGS. 44 and 45, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) in the first movable combination 90300 and the second movable combination 90400, which are the origin detection target combination, the detection control (shorting) Only initialization operation control) and operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) will be described, and the description of the third movable combination 9050 which is not the origin detection target combination will be omitted. Further, the reciprocation movement distance (rotation range) of the first movable part 90302 of the first movable part 90300 and the reciprocation movement distance (movement range) of the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 of the second movable part 90400 are the same. However, for convenience of explanation, it will be described using the same conceptual diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the first movable part 90302 of the first movable part 90300 and the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 of the second movable part 90400 respectively have an origin position (retracted position, initial position) and a rendering position. Between the origin position and the rendering position, the returning operation from the rendering position to the origin position is an actual operation that is actually performed in the movable object rendering described above.

  If the detected part of the movable combination is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the movable combination is installed for some reason (for example, transport or game island) When moving from the home position at the time, when the home position return was not possible at the previous operation (For example, at the time of presentation execution, the home position return of the movable character can not be confirmed due to step out of the motor, failure, catching, etc. If a character error (operation error) occurs that the robot can not move, etc.), if it moves from the home position due to the vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) a position other than the home position (eg, operation when not detected in FIG. 44) Operation control at the time of non-detection to return to the origin when it is in a predetermined position between the origin position and the rendering position), such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to control To run. When the non-detection operation control is performed, the movable part is located at a position away from the home position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable part toward the home position.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 detects the first movable portion 90302 of the first movable object 90300 and the detected portions of the second movable portions 90401 and 90402 of the second movable object 90400 when the second initialization process is executed. If detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at detection is executed.

  For example, the predetermined time period from when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor until the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor until the movement of the movable combination toward the origin position is restricted. In the case where the operable range (for example, the play) is set, it may return to the origin and may stop at a position further behind than the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control for returning the movable part to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this operation control at the time of detection, it is necessary to move the movable role to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor. It is not necessary to move the movable part to the home position after moving the movable part from the home position to the operating position at detection time which is near the home position. That is, it reciprocates by a distance shorter than the actual operation (see FIGS. 50A and 50B).

  In addition, after effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the second initialization process, it performs operation control for actual operation check. The operation control for checking the actual operation is the same operation as the actual operation that the movable combination actually performs in various effects and the like.

  Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation check operation control is compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 45 (A), 45 (B) and 45 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 90120 to operate each movable part, and are movable parts. Is different from the actual operating speed of That is, for example, when moving a predetermined movable combination, even when the same control speed is set to one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, the one moving section and the other moving section When the aspect is different (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable character actually moves The operating speed in the case of causing the control may be different from the control speed. In addition, even if the same control speed is set for the movable part, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable part, the actual operation of each movable part The speeds are not always the same. When operating a plurality of movable roles with a stepping motor having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable role, the size, weight, operation mode, and operating distance of each movable role, If there is a difference in drive mechanism etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable parts are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the operation control for actual operation check, the set process data for actual operation check corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. Operate the check target role based on the set control speed. Specifically, while accelerating from the origin position, it decelerates and stops at the effect position, and then accelerates from the effect position and then decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation to confirm that each movable combination can operate normally, the control speed of the movable combination is low → high → low between the origin position and the effect position. Change in order. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the movable body effect of each movable combination, the lowest speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed which is higher than the lowest speed. In order to control each movable combination to operate at a speed within the range, even when performing operation control for actual operation check, the lowest speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second higher than the lowest speed Each movable part is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speed of the movable part, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. It will be done. In the following, when the movable part is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable part is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed Explain as.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable part becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable role is controlled by the lowest speed in the operation control for operation check for a longer time than when stopping to the effect position. The object detection part is made to be detected by the origin detection sensor after decelerating surely.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), when effect control CPU 90120 executes operation control at the time of detection, actual operation check is always performed in the period for moving from the origin position to the effect position and in the period for moving from the effect position to the origin position The movable part is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control equal to or less than a minimum speed in the actual-operation check operation control as the second operation control (for example, the operation control for the actual-operation check Control is always performed to operate the movable part on the basis of the lowest minimum control speed among control speeds set in the operation control for checking the actual operation so that the same speed as the minimum speed in (1).

  In addition, in the case of operation control at the time of detection, since the operation distance of the movable combination is shorter than that of operation control for operation confirmation, the control speed when accelerating in operation control for operation confirmation, that is, operation at high speed, origin point Because the detection sensor can not reliably detect the detected part, or there is a risk that the movable combination etc. may be damaged by an impact when the movable combination returns from the short distance to the origin position and movement is restricted. Control is performed to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, when effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control, it is always moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Control is performed to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control as the second operation control (for example, Control to operate the movable part based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the operation control for actual operation check so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation) Do.

  In this case, it is unclear how far away the movable part is from the origin position, so when the movable part is located in the vicinity of the origin position, acceleration when performing operation control for actual operation check When the movable part is returned to the home position when the movable part is returned to the home position, the home position detection sensor can not reliably detect the detected part, or the movable part returns to the home position from a short distance. Since there is a possibility that the movable part etc. may be damaged by the impact when the movement is restricted, control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 always performs single operation based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. Control is performed so that the movable part operates at one (constant) operating speed. And since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation control for the actual operation check corresponding to each movable combination, and are not the operation speeds common to each movable combination, the minimum speeds in each movable combination may be different. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the first movable part 90302 of the first movable part 90300 and the second movable parts 90401 and 90402 of the second movable part 90400 have a size, weight, Because the operating mode, the operating distance, and the drive mechanism including the drive motor are different from one another, the actual operating speed of the movable part is different even when the same control speed is set. Also, even when different control speeds are set for each movable part, the actual operating speed of the movable part is different. As described above, the lowest speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable role, and in order to control to operate at the lowest speed optimum for the movable role, a plurality of movable modes different in aspect It is possible to reliably detect the character at the origin position.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S9055) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90120 first causes the pending storage display in the first pending storage display area 905D and the second pending storage display area 905U of the performance display device 905 to correspond to the storage content of the pending storage buffer. Pending display update processing for updating to display is executed (S9072).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs one of the processes in S9073 to S9079 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S9074).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S9075).

  Process during effect symbol variation (S9075): Control the switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitor the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S9076): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern decision command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S9078).

  During the big hit game processing (S9078): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S9079).

  Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Note that the effect control CPU 90120 is a predetermined timing (eg, movable object effect) in the effect symbol process (S 9075), the big hit display process (S 9077), the big hit game in process (S 9078), the big hit game in process (S 9078), etc. At the timing at which the execution condition of (1) is satisfied, it is possible to execute movable body effect that moves the movable role between the origin position and the effect position.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first movable position at which the first movable portion 90302 tilts sideways (see FIG. 47A) and the first movable position away from the first retraction. The first movable role 90300 rotatably provided between the first effect position (see FIG. 47B) where the unit 90302 stands upright, and the side of the effect display device 905 2) A second effect position (FIG. 48 (B (B) (B)), which is disposed at a substantially central position in the vertical direction in front of the effect display device 905 and the retracted position (origin position, initial position; see FIG. A second movable part 90400 provided to be reciprocally movable between them and a first movable part drive motor 90303 as a drive means for operating the movable part, and a second movable part drive motor 90411, 90421, (1) A presentation control CPU 90120 as control means for controlling the movement of the movable combination by the movable combination drive motor 90303 and the second movable combination drive motors 90411 and 90421, and the presentation control CPU 90120 performs the first operation control Operation control at non-detection time and operation control at detection time, operation control for actual operation confirmation as second operation control for confirming that the movable part can operate normally, and movable body by the movable part It is possible to execute the third operation control for producing effects, and when performing the operation control for actual operation check, it is the first speed as the lowest speed (low speed) and the second speed higher than the lowest speed. When the mobile character is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) and the operation control at non-detection time or the operation control at detection time is performed, the operation for checking the actual operation as the second operation control Movable won game at a minimum speed following speed is controlled to operate in your.

  In this way, in the first operation control, the movable part operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, so it can be safely positioned at the home position. Specifically, in non-detection operation control and detection operation control, the distance for moving the movable part to the origin position may be shorter than in actual operation check operation control, so non-detection operation control and detection By making the highest speed in the time movement control the lowest speed in the movement control for actual movement check, it is possible to reliably detect the detected part by the detection means, and the movement restriction while moving the movable part at high speed It is possible to avoid damage due to the impact.

  When non-detection operation control or detection operation control is performed, the non-detection operation control or detection is performed when control is performed so that the movable combination operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in actual operation check operation control. The control speed set when executing the time operation control and the minimum control speed set in the operation control for operation check may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

  In addition, when effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control and detection operation control, it is always set to a single (constant) operation speed set in advance, that is, the lowest speed in actual operation check operation control. The first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 are controlled to operate.

  By doing this, it is possible to make the speed at the time of positioning the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 at the origin position constant, and the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 Can be prevented.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the first movable combination 90300 or the second movable combination is generated at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation check operation control. An object 90400 is controlled to operate.

  By doing this, the speed is lowered excessively while securing the safe operation of the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 (for example, a speed slower than the minimum speed in the operation control for operation check) The period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control can be shortened by selecting the maximum speed (first speed) at which the system can operate safely.

  Also, a first movable combination origin detection sensor 90316 as a detection means capable of detecting that the first movable combination 90300 or the second movable combination 90400 is located at the origin position, a second movable combination origin detection sensor 90440 A, 90440 B, the effect control CPU 90 120 performs the non-detection operation control at S 90105 to S 90 114 if the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state at S 90 104 in the second initialization process, and the origin detection sensor at S 90 104 When in the detection state, the operation control at the time of detection of S90120 to S90128 is executed, and when the operation control at the time of non-detection is executed, the movable part is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control at the time of detection.

  By doing this, the presence or absence of a defect of the first movable combination object origin detection sensor 90316 or the second movable combination object origin detection sensors 90440A, 90440B can also be grasped by the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control. . Moreover, when performing operation control at the time of non-detection, it is unclear whether or not the movable part is near the origin position, whereas when performing operation control at the time of detection, the movable part is at the origin position Since the detection operation control is performed at a speed higher than that of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control may be performed at a speed lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not detect the origin detection sensor in step S90109 in the second initialization process when a specific abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality or the like occurred at the time of performing the effect) occurs. The first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 are controlled to move toward the origin position direction at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation until the number of operation error determination times reaches "3". .

  By doing this, the first movable part 90300 or the second movable part 90300 is also included in the abnormal operation performed when a specific abnormality (for example, an error such as an operation abnormality occurred at the time of performing the rendering) occurs. The movable part 90400 can be operated safely. Specifically, for example, when an operation error occurs at the time of effect execution, when the second initialization processing is performed thereafter, the movable role does not return to the origin position, so the operation control at the time of non-detection It will be executed. In addition, since it is possible that the movable part does not operate even in the second initialization processing when an operation abnormality occurs, the first movable part 90300 or the like at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check as an abnormal operation. The second movable part 90400 is controlled to move toward the home position.

  When the storage for origin return error of the target role is stored in step S90201 in the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to step S90220 and does not perform operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  By doing this, it is possible to prevent the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 from being stopped at a position other than the origin during operation control for actual operation check due to an abnormality. Specifically, for example, it is conceivable that the movable role does not operate even in the second initialization process when an operation error occurs during execution of the effect, in which case the operation control for actual operation check is executed. It is preferable not to execute the operation control for checking the actual operation because the load is only applied to the driving means and is wasted.

  The first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 as the first movable part and the third movable part 90500 as the second movable part are included as movable parts, and the CPU 90120 for effect control is If it is determined in step S90102 in the second initialization process that the movable combination is the origin detection target combination that requires origin detection, the non-detection operation control or detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation If it is determined in step S90102 that the movable combination is not an origin detection target combination that requires origin detection in step S90102, the process advances to step S90130 to perform non-detection operation control and detection operation control. Absent.

  In this way, only the necessary movable combination can perform operation control for actual operation confirmation, and the operation confirmation time by the operation control for actual operation confirmation can be shortened.

  The first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400 as the first movable part and the third movable part 90500 as the second movable part are included as movable parts, and the CPU 90120 for effect control is When executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation of each of the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400, the movable at the lowest speed in the operation control for each actual operation check The character is controlled to operate, and the operation speed of the operation control for actual operation confirmation is made to be different between the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400.

  By doing this, it is possible to shorten the period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control while securing the safe operation of each movable combination according to the operation speed according to each movable combination. For example, even if the same control speed is set in the operation control for actual operation check in the first movable part 90300 and the second movable part 90400, the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance of each movable part If there is a difference in drive mechanism etc., the actual operating speed of each movable combination when performing non-detection operation control and detection operation control will be different.

  Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, even when the same control speed (the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation check) is set, among the plurality of movable roles The actual operating speed of the heavy mobile part is slower than the actual operating speed of the small mobile part. In addition, when the movable part is raised, the actual operating speed is slower than when the movable part is lowered. In addition, when a spring or the like that biases the movable portion in the rendering direction is provided as a drive mechanism, when moving the spring in a direction against the biasing force in a compressed state, the biasing force in a state in which the spring is stretched The actual operating speed is slower than when moving in the direction to resist. As described above, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, when the movable combination is controlled such that the movable combination operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, It is preferable to set an individual minimum control speed in each operation check for actual operation check in consideration of the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism and the like.

  For example, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are disposed back and forth so that the second movable portion overlaps the front side of the first movable portion when viewed from the player when moving toward the origin position. When one of the first movable portion and the second movable portion is controlled together when performing any of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation check operation control, It is preferable to control so that the operation speed (minimum speed) of 1 movable part and 2nd movable part may differ. By doing this, temporarily, the power is turned on in a state in which the first movable portion and the second movable portion are respectively moved to positions away from the origin position for some reason, and in the second initialization processing of S9051. When the non-detection operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is executed together, the operation speeds (minimum speeds) of both the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled to be the same. Then, it becomes difficult to see the situation in which the first movable part is hidden by the second movable part and moves to the origin position, but the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled to have different minimum speeds. Since the movable part and the second movable part shift when moving, it is easy to confirm the home position return operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

  In addition, even in the case where the first movable portion and the second movable portion larger (or longer) than the first movable portion are provided, the operation speeds (minimum speeds) of the first movable portion and the second movable portion are different. It is preferable to control the By doing this, for example, at least in any of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control of the first movable portion which is smaller (or shorter) than the second movable portion and therefore inconspicuous Since the speed is larger (or longer) than the first movable part, the second movable part can be made slower than the lowest speed in any of the non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation check operation control that is noticeable The operation of each of the first movable portion and the second movable portion can be easily confirmed.

  As described above, when the first movable portion and the second movable portion different from the first movable portion are provided, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion are performed. It is preferable to control so that the operation speed (minimum speed) in the operation control for operation confirmation is different. In addition, when controlling so that the operation speed (minimum speed) of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part differs in this way, the operation control at the time of non-detection of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part, operation control at the time of detection The minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation may be different or may be the same.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the embodiment, as an example of the movable part, the first movable part 90300 rotatable between the origin position and the effect position, and the second movable movable between the origin position and the effect position Although the embodiment to which the movable part 90400 and the third movable part 90500 rotatable about the rotation axis are applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement aspect of these movable parts (for example, The movement direction and the rotation direction) and the number of installation can be changed variously without being limited to the above. In addition, a movable combination that operates in an operation mode other than the above may be applied.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first movable object 90300 and the second movable object 90400 operable between the origin position and the effect position are applied as the origin object role, and the third movable as the origin non-target object Although the embodiment to which the accessory 90500 is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third movable component is also the third movable component such as the third movable component 90500 which does not operate between the origin position and the rendering position. By setting the origin position at the rotational position of the unit 90502, it may be set as the origin object role.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the second initialization process exemplifies a mode in which the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control is performed on one movable combination, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, at least the operation control at the time of non-detection may be executed. When only the non-detection operation control can be performed, the non-detection operation control may not be performed when the movable part is detected by the origin detection sensor in the second initialization process.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum speed in the operation control for the actual operation check as the second operation control and Although the embodiment in which the movable part is controlled to operate at the same speed has been exemplified, the invention is not limited to this, and for non-detection operation control and detection operation control, for actual operation confirmation as second operation control The movable part may be controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control. For example, the movable part is controlled to operate at an operating speed slower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. May be

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control which is the first operation control, it is possible to move at a single operation speed (minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check) which is always preset. Although an example in which the accessory operates, that is, the mobile character is controlled to operate at a constant speed is illustrated, the invention is not limited thereto. For example, when returning to the origin position, It is also possible to control to operate at a speed lower than the minimum speed by gradually decelerating from the lowest speed in the operation control for operation control. That is, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control which is the first operation control, if the speed is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control, the speed is made variable in a predetermined moving period. It is also good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control which is the first operation control, the operation of the movable part is performed at the same operation speed (minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check). Although the control mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control is controlled to be equal to or less than the minimum speed in the detection operation control, For example, the movable role may be operated at different operation speeds in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the movable abnormality is not detected by the detection means when a specific abnormality such as an error occurs, that is, the origin detection sensor detects the movement in step S90109 in the second initialization process. If not, control to move the first movable part 90300 or the second movable part 90400 toward the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check until the number of operation error determination times reaches "3" Is not limited to this, and a special speed that is lower than the minimum speed in detection operation control, for example, a low speed that is set for an error and can obtain a relatively large torque. The movable part may be controlled to operate.

  In the above embodiment, if the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S90124 in the second initialization process, that is, if the operation target role is not located at the origin position (initial position) Repeat the processing of S90122 to S90127 until the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, based on the set process data, based on the minimum control speed set in the operation control for operation check, the movable part In the second initialization process, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, the movable role is started from that point. Non-detection operation control that moves the object toward the home position based on the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation check It may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the first movable part 90300, the second movable part 90400, and the third movable part 90500 are provided as the plurality of movable parts, and in the second initialization process, the non-detection operation control, Although the first movable part 90300, the second movable part 90400, and the third movable part 90500 are applied as movable objects to be subjected to operation control during detection and operation control for actual operation confirmation, The present invention is not limited to this, and a movable combination that is an execution target of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation check operation control in the second initialization process is the first movable combination 90300, Not limited to one movable character such as the second movable character 90400 and the third movable character 90500 being an execution target, for example, it has a plurality of movable parts in which one movable character can operate (for example, 2 mobile role 90 In the case of having the second movable portion 90401 and the second movable portion 90402), each movable portion is subject to execution of operation control at non-detection, operation control at detection, operation control for actual operation check, and each movable portion In the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control may be sequentially performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation control for checking the actual operation in the second initialization process, the CPU for effect control 90120 accelerates and decelerates the movable combination in the forward operation and the return operation, respectively, so that low speed → high speed → low speed → Although the form which controls to become stop was illustrated, it is not limited to this, and operation speed in operation control at the time of movable object production and operation control in actual operation check is not restricted to what is controlled in the above-mentioned form For example, control may be performed so that low speed and high speed are repeated a plurality of times such as low speed → high speed → low speed → high speed → low speed → stop, etc. Control is performed so that the operating speed changes in the order of low speed → middle speed → high speed. You may

  Further, control may be performed so that the change mode of the operation speed and the minimum speed are different between the forward operation and the return operation. If the minimum speed is different between the forward operation and the return operation, the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control is the higher of the forward operation and the return operation in the actual operation check operation control. The speed may be set to be lower than the minimum speed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation control for checking the actual operation in the second initialization process, the CPU for effect control 90120 exemplifies a mode for performing control to accelerate and decelerate the movable role to change the operation speed. The invention is not limited to this, and the movable part may be controlled to operate at a single operating speed. As described above, when the movable part is controlled to operate at a single operating speed, the single operating speed is the lowest speed in the operation control for the actual operation check. The maximum speed in the time movement control may be set to be a speed lower than the minimum speed.

  In the above embodiment, the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control as the first operation have been exemplified in the second initialization processing at the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not performed, but it is performed at timing other than the start time (for example, after execution of error processing including character item error and other various errors, at the start of fluctuation of symbol, or after execution of movable combination effect) You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, as the order data of the movable part in the second initialization process, the first movable part 90300 → the second movable part 90400 → the third movable part 90500 in the order of non-detection operation control or detection Although the mode in which the time operation control and the operation control for actual operation confirmation are executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the order is arbitrary, and each operation may be performed in an order other than the above. . Alternatively, any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the operation confirmation operation control for two or more of the plurality of movable combination objects may be concurrently executed.

  In addition, although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed after execution of the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control for all the movable roles, the present invention is not limited thereto. After performing non-detection operation control of the feature or operation control during detection and operation control for actual operation check, perform other non-detection operation control or detection operation control and operation control for actual operation check You may

  In the above embodiment, the process data for confirming the actual operation has been described as having the same operation content as the operation at the time of the actual presentation described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation check operation control does not have to be completely the same operation as long as it includes all the operations of the operation speed in the actual effect, for example, when there are a plurality of effect operations in which part of the operation is different In the above, the process data for operation confirmation may be described in which a confirmation-only operation incorporating all of a plurality of different rendering operations is described.

  In the above embodiment, the number of operation error determinations in S90113, S90127, and S90213 is set to “3”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of operation error determinations is other than “3”. The number of times of operation error determination in each of S90113, S90127, and S90213 may be set as the number of times.

  In the above embodiment, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed in the second initialization process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, The execution timing of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control can be set arbitrarily. For example, after the end of the movable object effect, when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started, or when the demonstration effect is executed, etc. It may be performed on

  Further, although the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, gaming balls of a predetermined number of balls can be circulated inside the gaming machine And the number of balls used for the game is reduced and stored, while the number of balls that have been enclosed and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, or the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning is added. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the gaming values.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value At the same time, one game is ended by the variable display result being derived on the variable display device capable of the variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified respectively, and the winning is achieved according to the variable display result derived on the variable display device The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical gaming ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of gaming media, but it is not limited to spherical gaming media, for example, non-spherical gaming media such as medals. It may be

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 effect display device 100 microcomputer for game control 120 CPU for effect control
901 Pachinko gaming machine 90120 CPU for effect control
90300 1st movable part 90302 1st movable part 90303 1st movable part drive motor 90316 1st movable part origin detection sensor 90400 2nd movable part 90401, 90402 2nd movable part 90411, 90421 2nd movable part drive Motor 90440A, 90440B Second movable combination product origin detection sensor 90500 Third movable combination product 90502 Third movable part 90520 Third movable combination product drive motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Abnormality determination means capable of determining an abnormality corresponding to a plurality of types of events having different priorities;
When the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination unit, the notification is ended when the priority of the determined abnormality is higher than the priority of the abnormality being notified, and the notification about the determined abnormality is performed. Abnormality notification means,
State control means for controlling to a state corresponding to the determined abnormality based on the determination of the abnormality by the abnormality determination means;
Signal control means for controlling an external output signal output to the outside of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The abnormality notification means controls the predetermined state regardless of the priority of the abnormality when a new event corresponding to the abnormality occurs when the state controlled by the state control means is the predetermined state. Continue reporting on the anomaly that triggered the
The signal control means
The external output signal can be brought into the second state when being controlled to the predetermined state,
In the case where a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs when the predetermined state is not controlled, the external output signal is changed from the first state to the second state based on the priority of the abnormality; There are cases where the output signal does not change from the first state to the second state,
When controlled to the predetermined state, when a new event corresponding to an abnormality occurs, the external output signal is not changed from the second state to the first state regardless of the priority of the abnormality. Gaming machine.